2003 rsx online reference owner's manual...

320
2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents Owner's Identification Form Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii Your Car at a Glance ........................................................................................................................... 2 Driver and Passenger Safety .............................................................................................................. 5 Proper use and care of your car's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 57 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 101 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 153 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new car, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 167 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 193 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 253 Tips on cleaning and protecting your car. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 261 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 287 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 301 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 306 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Upload: others

Post on 30-Aug-2020

0 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Your Car at a Glance ...........................................................................................................................2

Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your car's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 57 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 101 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 153 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new car, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 167 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 193 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 253 Tips on cleaning and protecting your car. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 261 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 287 ID numbers, dim ensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 301 A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 306 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Page 2: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This Owner’s Manual should be considered apermanent part of the vehicle, and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice and withoutincurring any obligation whatsoever.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe Acura RSX. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33S6MC10

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

Page 3: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Acura, otherproperty, or the environment.

Several warranties protect your new Acura. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to readthis manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so youcan refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helpsto keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. Whenyour car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’s staff isspecially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura. YourAcura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2003 Acura RSX was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

Page 4: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

--

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your car. You must useyour own good judgement.

on the car.

how to use this car correctly and safely.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Section

Safety Headings

Safety MessagesSafety Labels

Instructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

Page 5: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Your Car at a Glance

2

DOOR ANDHATCH LOCK SWITCH

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

INDICATOR LIGHTSGAUGES

(P. 59)(P. 66)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

AUDIO SYSTEM

SHIFT LEVER

PARKING BRAKE

(P. 102)

MIRROR CONTROLS(P. 94)

(P. 79)

(P. 91)

FUEL FILLDOOR RELEASE(P. 156)

(P. 157)HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

(P. 95)

(P. 125)

(P. 172, 175)

Page 6: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Your Car at a Glance

3

TILT ADJUSTMENT

HORN

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS(P. 70)

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTSREAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

CRUISE CONTROL(P. 149)

MOONROOF(P. 93)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS(P. 69/70)

(P. 70/71)

(P. 73) (P. 73)

(P. 74)

Page 7: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

4

Page 8: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your car.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.........................................Airbags . 10

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11..........................Head Restraints . 11

..................................Door Locks . 11........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12

............................Protecting Adults . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

4. Fasten and Position the Seat.....................................Belts . 16

....5. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 176. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

........................Protecting Children . 21All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 21Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 22The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks to...............................Children . 22

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 24

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 24

...Additional Safety Precautions . 25General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 26.......................Protecting Infants . 30

.........Protecting Small Children . 34

.......Protecting Larger Children . 37Using Child Seats with

.....................................Tethers . 41.............................Using LATCH . 42

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 44

..Seat Belt System Components . 44......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 45

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 46Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 48........................SRS Components . 48

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 48

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 50How the SRS Indicator Light

.......................................Works . 51How the Side Airbag Cutoff

...........Indicator Light Works . 52.............................Airbag Service . 53

...Additional Safety Precautions . 53.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54

...................................Safety Labels . 55

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

5

Page 9: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

.)

Children are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage .)

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page .)

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your car is equippedwith airbags, make sure you andyour passengers always wear yourseat belts, and wear them properly.(See page .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

16

21

196

13

Driver and Passenger Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Restrain All Children

Keep Your Car in Safe ConditionDon’t Drink and Drive

6

Page 10: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Your car is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; a collapsible steering column;and seat belt tensioners thatautomatically tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Car’s Safety Features

7

(8) Side Airbags(9) Seat Belt Tensioners(10) Door Locks

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zone(3) Seats & Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags

(7)

(10)

(1) (3) (4) (6)

(8)

(2)

(9)(7)(5)

(2)

Page 11: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

For your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your car isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can’t take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand

In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your car has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Car’s Safety Features

Seat Belts

always wear your seat beltsproperly.

Why Wear Seat Belts

8

Page 12: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thecar’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

What you should do:

Your Car’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety 9

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Page 13: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Your car also has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.

Your car has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with dual-stage, dual-threshold front airbags tohelp protect the heads and chests ofthe driver and a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe frontalcollision.

Airbags

Your Car’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

10

Page 14: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the car, or by aninflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt’s effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat’soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

Your car’s seats are designed to keepyou in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever the car ismoving.

Keeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe car during a crash. It also helpsprevent occupants from accidentallyopening a door and falling out, andoutsiders from unexpectedly openingyour doors.Head restraints can help protect you

from whiplash and other injuries.

Seats & Seat-Backs Door Locks

Head Restraints

What you should do:

Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Car’s Safety Features

11

Page 15: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page

).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page ).

To make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your car’s safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Seat-backs are upright (see page).

Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page ).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page ).

Both doors are closed and locked(see page ).

16

21

13

14

13

164

Pre-Drive Safety Checklist

Your Car’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety12

Page 16: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

After everyone has entered the car,be sure the doors are closed andlocked.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the car is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the car during a crash.

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

37

79

CONTINUED

Introduction Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the Doors1. 2.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety 13

Page 17: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat away from thesteering wheel to the farthestdistance that allows you to maintainfull control of the car.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversadjust the seat so the center of thechest is at least 10 inches (25 cm)away from the center of the steeringwheel. Also make sure your frontseat passenger moves the seat as farto the rear as possible.

86

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Page 18: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

86

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety 15

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

Page 19: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack from theshoulder part, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder. Thisspreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upperbody.

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

4.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety16

Page 20: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourAcura dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

44

74

Adjust the Steering Wheel5.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt.

17

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

Page 21: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thecar is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the car, orby being struck by an inflating frontairbag. Being struck by an inflatingside airbag can result in possiblyserious injuries.

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your car’s airbagsand other safety features, you mustsit properly and wear your seat beltproperly.

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Page 22: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a vehicle.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

19

Page 23: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp objects inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel or on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe front airbag inflates.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

20

Page 24: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

(See page.)

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how toprotect young passengers.

So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your car, be sure toread this section. (See page .)

26

37

properly

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children

All Children Must Be Restrained

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt, and use abooster, if needed.

21

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

Page 25: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it inflates with tremendousspeed.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour car crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

During acrash, the belt could press deepinto the child and cause veryserious injuries.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks to Children

Children Should Sit in the BackSeat

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Additional Precautions to ParentsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant or child.

22

Page 26: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your car haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseats, in a booster seat if needed,and be properly restrained with aseat belt.

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children

U.S. ModelsSmall ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

23

Page 27: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger’s front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your car has warning labelson the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Your car has two seating positions inthe back seat where children can beproperly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thantwo children in your car:

37

13

18

16

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Canadian Models

24

Page 28: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Children who play in cars canaccidentally get trapped inside thecar. Teach your children not toplay in or around cars.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the hatch, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not leave children alone in yourvehicle.

Lock both doors and the hatchwhen your vehicle is not in use.

Keep car keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

25

Page 29: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant’shead, neck, and back. See page

for additional information onprotecting infants.

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the box and seat.

30

General Guidelines for UsingChild Seats

Infants:

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safetystandards.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

2.

1.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety26

Page 30: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

However, Acura is confident that oneor more child seat models can fit andbe properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour car.

Your car has lower anchoragesinstalled for use with LATCH-compatible child seats. For moreinformation, see page .

34

42

CONTINUED

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Small Children:

3.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety 27

Page 31: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Never in the front seat, dueto the front airbag hazard.

The passenger’s front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child’s head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure a front-facing child seat with the seat belt(see page ).

Recommended positions.Properly secure a rear-facing childseat (see page ).

Recommendedpositions. Properly secure a front-facing child seat (see page ).

This page briefly summarizes Acura’srecommendations on where to placerear-facing and forward-facing childseats in your car.

35

31

35

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s SeatInfants:

Back Seats

Small children:

Infants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety28

Page 32: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

When you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the car during acrash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

However, a child seat does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat’s effectiveness.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

All child seats aredesigned to be secured to the carwith the lap part of a lap/shoulderbelt. Some child seats can besecured to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system instead. A childwhose seat is not properly securedto the car can be endangered in acrash. See pages , and forinstructions on how to properlysecure child seats in this car.

423531

Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.

Storing a Child Seat

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Properly secure the child seat tothe car.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety 29

Page 33: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back. Infants up to aboutone year of age must be restrained ina rear-facing child seat.

In this car, a rear-facing child seatcan be placed in any seating positionin the back seat, but not in the frontseat.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If the passenger’sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant. If an infant must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the baby.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant is at least one yearold, reaches the seat maker’s weightor height limit, and is able to sit upwithout support.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety30

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Page 34: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

The lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a rear-facing child seat withthis type of seat belt.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

1.42

2.

3.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

31

Page 35: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

4. 5.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety32

Page 36: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby’sdoctor or follow the seat maker’srecommendations.

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page ). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page ).

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Oryou may wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

13

14

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

33

Page 37: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

In this car, the best place to install aforward-facing child seat is in one ofthe seating positions in the back seat.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries. If asmall child must be closely watched,we recommend that another adult sitin the back seat with the child.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

A child at least one year old who cansit up without support, and who fitswithin the child seat maker’s weightand height limits, should berestrained in a forward-facing,upright child seat.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety34

Page 38: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the car, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

1.42

CONTINUED

Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety 35

Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

Page 39: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

4. 5.2.

3.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety36

Page 40: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild seat, unlatch the buckle,unroute the seat belt, and let the beltfully retract.

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat on abooster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.

We recommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

Protecting Larger Children

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety 37

Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possibleand wears the seat belt properly.

Page 41: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childsit in the rear seat, all the way backagainst the seat and put on the seatbelt. Follow the instructions on page

. Then check how the belt fits.

However, if the shoulder belttouches or crosses the child’s neck,or if the lap belt crosses the child’sstomach, the child needs to use abooster seat.

This could result in serious neck andinternal injuries during a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.If the shoulder part of the belt rests

over the child’s collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, andthe lap belt rests over the child’shipbones and touches the tops of

their thighs as shown, the child isprobably big enough to wear the seatbelt.

16

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck or over the stomach.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety38

Page 42: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

In addition, the passenger’s frontairbag poses serious risks to children.If the seat is too far forward, or thechild’s head is thrown forwardduring a collision, or the child isunrestrained or out of position, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a high or low-back style that allows the child to bedirectly secured with the lap/shoulder belt.

A child should continue using abooster seat until the child exceedsthe booster seat manufacturer’srequirements.

Even then, the child may still need touse a booster seat. Note that somestates now require children to useboosters until they reach a certainage and/or weight. Be sure to checkcurrent laws in the state or stateswhere you intend to drive.

CONTINUED

When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontUsing a Booster Seat

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety 39

Page 43: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride. Remind the child not to lean toward

the door because of the side airbag.

16 38

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety40

Page 44: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

To use the anchorage point, pivot itscover down.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point and tightenthe strap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions.

Remove the cargo area cover whenyou use a tether. See Cargo AreaCover on page .

Your Acura has two tetheranchorage points on the rear panelfor securing a tether-style child seatto the car.

89

Using Child Seats with Tethers

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety 41

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

COVER

Page 45: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Your car is equipped with LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren) at the rear seats. Thelower anchors are located betweenthe seat-back and seat bottom andare to be used only with a child seatdesigned for use with LATCH.

The exact location of each loweranchorage is marked with a smallcircle above the lower anchoragepoint.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Move the seat belt buckle or seatbelt tongue away from the loweranchors.

Make sure there are no foreignobjects around the anchors.Foreign objects could get in theway of a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Put the child seat in the rear leftor right vehicle seat and attach thechild seat to the lower anchorsaccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Using LATCH

42

LOWER ANCHORAGES Rigid type

Page 46: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Follow the child seat maker’sinstructions for any additionaladvice on adjusting or tighteningthe fit.

Attach the attaching clip to thetether anchor fitting and tightenthe strap according to the childseat maker’s instructions. Makesure the strap is not twisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers.

This symbol on rear or forwardfacing child seats or boostercushions indicates the presence ofLATCH compatible hardware.

4. 5.

6.

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety

Lower Universal AnchorageSystem Symbol

43

Flexible type

Page 47: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This seat belt has a single belt thatgoes over your shoulder, across yourchest and across your hips.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver’s seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver’sseat belt is fastened.

The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages and for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting the car,be sure the belt is out of the way andwill not get closed in the door.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all four seatingpositions.

31 35

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety44

Page 48: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

See page for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions.The tensioners are independent ofthe airbag system, so they can beactivated during a collision thatmight not cause the airbags todeploy. In this case, the airbagswould not be needed but theadditional seat belt tension can behelpful.

The tensioners will be activated in acollision severe enough to cause thefront airbags to inflate.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

16

CONTINUED

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety 45

Page 49: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalway.

The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).

Acura provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Acura will repair orreplace any seat belt component thatfails to function properly duringnormal use. Please see your

booklet fordetails.

51

AcuraWarranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance

U.S. Models

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety46

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Page 50: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .257

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety 47

Page 51: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

Two front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour car’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, dual-threshold airbags to helpreduce the chance of airbag-causedinjuries.

4551

SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety48

Page 52: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe car as soon as it is safe to do so.

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety 49

Page 53: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

U.S. Owners:For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled

that came with yourowner’s manual.

Canadian Owners:For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled

Your car is equipped with sideairbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags

SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

How Your Side Airbags Work

50

Page 54: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,your front or side airbags may notdeploy, your passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system may notwork properly, or your seat belttensioners may not work when youneed them. See your Acura dealer assoon as possible.

The purpose of the SRSindicator light is to alert

you to a potential problem with yourfront airbags. This light will alsoalert you to a potential problem withyour automatic seat belt tensioners(page ); or your side airbags orpassenger’s side airbag automaticcutoff system (page ).

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly.

52

45

How the SRS Indicator LightWorks

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety 51

Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

Page 55: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the indicator should lightbriefly and go out (see page ). If itdoesn’t light, stays on, or comes onwhile driving without a passenger inthe front seat, have the systemchecked.

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag.

If the side airbag indicator lightcomes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in the front seat, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child’s head is in the sideairbag deployment path.

It does not mean there is a problemwith your side airbags. It means thatthe side airbag cutoff system hasactivated to prevent the side airbagfrom deploying.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your car has anautomatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

60

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

How the Side Airbag CutoffIndicator Light Works

52

Page 56: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

See page for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Your front and side airbag systemsare virtually maintenance-free, andthere are no parts you can safelyservice. However, you must haveyour car serviced if:

Take your car to anauthorized Acura dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit, automatic seat belttensioners and other related parts.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an Acura dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

162

Airbag Service Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting anAcura dealer.

Your airbags ever inflate.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety 53

Page 57: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Push the button.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Your car’s exhaust contains carbonmonoxide gas. You should have noproblem with carbon monoxideentering the car in normal driving ifyou maintain your car properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The car is raised for an oil change.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The car was in an accident thatmay have damaged the underside.

If you must sit in your parked car,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

With the hatch open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your car’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thehatch open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver and Passenger Safety54

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

Page 58: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Acura dealerfor a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

Driver and Passenger Safety 55

RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISORDASHBOARD

HOOD

Page 59: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

56

Page 60: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Acura. All the essential controlsare within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 58...............................Indicator Lights . 59

Maintenance Required...................................Indicator . 64

.........Security System Indicator . 65.............................................Gauges . 66

...............................Speedometer . 66.................................Tachometer . 66

.....................................Odometer . 66...................................Trip Meter . 67..................................Fuel Gauge . 67

...................Temperature Gauge . 67Controls Near the Steering

.......................................Wheel . 68...................................Headlights . 69

............Daytime Running Lights . 69....Instrument Panel Brightness . 70

................................Turn Signals . 70.....................Windshield Wipers . 71

..................Windshield Washers . 72Rear Window Wiper and

.....................................Washer . 72..........................Hazard Warning . 73

.............Rear Window Defogger . 73......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 74

...............................Keys and Locks . 75..............................................Keys . 75

....................Immobilizer System . 76............................Ignition Switch . 77

..................................Door Locks . 79

.........Power Door/Hatch Locks . 80............................................Hatch . 80

...................Remote Transmitter . 81....................................Glove Box . 84

............................Seat Adjustments . 85.............Front Seat Adjustments . 85

Driver’s Seat Height..............................Adjustment . 86

...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 86........................Rear Seat Access . 86

...........................Folding Rear Seat . 87....................................Seat Heaters . 88

...........................Cargo Area Cover . 89..............................Power Windows . 90

.........................................Moonroof . 93.............................................Mirrors . 94

....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 94.................................Parking Brake . 95..................................Vanity Mirror . 96

........................................Coat Hook . 96.............................Beverage Holder . 97

...................Console Compartment . 98...............Accessory Power Socket . 99

.................................Interior Lights . 99

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 57

Page 61: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls58

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

FUEL FILLDOOR RELEASE

MIRROR CONTROLS INDICATOR LIGHTSGAUGES

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

AUDIO SYSTEM

SHIFT LEVER

PARKING BRAKEHOOD RELEASE HANDLE

DOOR ANDHATCH LOCK SWITCH(P. 80)

(P. 91)

(P. 94) (P. 66)(P. 59)

(P. 102)

(P. 125)

(P. 172, 175)

(P. 95)(P. 157)

(P. 151)

Page 62: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls 59

(P.62)HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.60)

SIDE AIRBAG CUT-OFF INDICATOR (P.60)

(P.62)TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARDWARNING INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.62)

(P.62)DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR

(P.60)SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT

(P.61)ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

(P.61)PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.61)MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

(P.61)LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

(P.61)CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.62)

(P.64)MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR (P.63)

(P.65)SECURITY SYSTEMINDICATOR

Page 63: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your car.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This light willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff systemor automatic seat belt tensioners.For complete information, see page

.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.

51

52

Instruments and Controls

Indicator Lights

Seat Belt Reminder Light

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag CutoffIndicator

60

Page 64: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This light has two functions:

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page .

See page .

This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III).

If this light comes on at any othertime, there is a problem in the ABS.If this happens, take the car to yourdealer to have it checked. With thelight on, your car still has normalbraking ability but no anti-lock. Forcomplete information, see page .

1.

2.

278

183

275

274

276

Only on models equipped with ABS (seepage )181

Instruments and Controls

Indicator Lights

Parking Brakeand BrakeSystemIndicator

Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS)Indicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

61

U.S. CanadaU.S. Canada

Page 65: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signaling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the car should flash.

This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page for informationon operating the cruise control.

This light comes on if either door isnot closed tightly.

This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

246

149

69Only on models equipped with CruiseControl System

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Cruise Control Indicator

Door-open Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

High Beam Indicator

62

Page 66: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page ).

76

216

Canadian models only Canadian models only

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Washer Level Indicator‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

63

Page 67: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your car in forscheduled maintenance.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages .

For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)and 10,000 miles (16,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

198 202

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

Maintenance Required Indicator

64

MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR

Page 68: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourAcura dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the select/resetbutton in the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

Hold the button until the indicatorresets (approximately tenseconds).

This indicator lights when thesecurity system is set. See page

for complete information on thesecurity system.

1.

2.

3.

148

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls

Security System Indicator

65

SELECT/RESET BUTTON

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Page 69: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your car has been driven. Itmeasures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

Speedometer

Odometer

Tachometer

Gauges

Instruments and Controls66

TEMPERATURE GAUGE TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE

SELECT/RESET BUTTONODOMETER/TRIP METER

Page 70: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to nearthe upper white mark. If it reachesthe red (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

This shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the car is onlevel ground. It may show slightlymore or less than the actual amountwhen you are driving on curvy orhilly roads.

The needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the odometer bypressing the Select/Reset buttonrepeatedly. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances. 212

Gauges

Instruments and Controls

Temperature GaugeFuel GaugeTrip Meter

67

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

Page 71: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

The controls on the dashboard to theright of the steering column are forthe instrument panel brightness,hazard warning lights and rearwindow defogger.

The moonroof switch and cruisecontrol switch are to the left of thesteering column.

The tilt adjustment lever on theunderside of the steering columnallows you to tilt the steering wheel.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls68

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

HORN

TILT ADJUSTMENTHEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

MOONROOF

CRUISECONTROL

Page 72: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off.

The high beams will stay on for aslong as you hold the lever back, nomatter what position the headlightswitch is in.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.To change between low beams and

high beams, pull the turn signal leveruntil you hear a click, then let go.The blue high beam indicator willlight (see page ).

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder beeper when you open thedriver’s door.

62

Headlights

Daytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls 69

Page 73: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

The knob on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights. Turn the knob toadjust the brightness.

Instrument Panel Brightness Turn Signals

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls70

TURN SIGNAL LEVER

Page 74: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This lever controls the windshieldwipers and washers. It has fivepositions:

MIST: mistOFF: offINT: intermittentLO: low speedHI: high speed

To select a position, push the leverup or down.

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. The sweepinterval will change slightly withspeed; getting shorter as you drivefaster. In low speed and high speed,the wipers run continuously.

You can vary how often the wiperssweep the windshield by turning theINT TIME ring next to the rotaryswitch.

If you turn the INT TIME ring to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange from intermittent to lowspeed operation when vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

CONTINUED

Windshield Wipers

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls 71

Page 75: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever up from theOFF position. The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.This gives you a quick way to clearthe windshield.

To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever.

To turn on the rear window wiper,turn the rotary switch clockwise toON. To also use the rear windowwasher, turn the rotary switchclockwise past ON. The washer willspray as long as you hold the rotaryswitch in this position. If you turn therotary switch counterclockwise fromthe OFF position, the washer willspray without activating the rearwindow wiper.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Windshield Washers Rear Window Wiper and Washer

72

Page 76: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light in thebutton lights to show the defogger ison. If you do not turn it off, thedefogger will shut itself off afterabout 25 minutes. It also shuts offwhen you turn off the ignition. Youhave to turn it on again when yourestart the car.

Push the red button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and bothindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if your caris disabled.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side to side.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger

73

Page 77: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

17

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel to thedesired position, making sure thewheel points toward your chest,not toward your face. Make sureyou can see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

1.

3.

4.

2.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls

Steering Wheel Adjustment

74

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thecar and be seriously injured in acrash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the car is stopped.

Page 78: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

Your car comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the glove box locked when youleave your car and the valet key at aparking facility.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

The master key fits all the locks onyour car:• Ignition• Doors• Glove box

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Keepthe tag stored in a safe place. If youneed to replace a key, use only anAcura-approved key blank.

Keys

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls 75

MASTER KEY(BLACK)

VALET KEY(GREY)

KEYNUMBERTAG

Page 79: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The Immobilizer System protectsyour car from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Acura dealer.

Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourcar’s key and the ignition switchwhile trying to start the engine.

Your car also comes with two remotetransmitters; see page for anexplanation of the operation.

82

Instruments and Controls

Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks

Remote Transmitter

76

Page 80: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (III)

The Immobilizer System indicatorwill also blink several times whenyou turn the ignition switch from ON(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour car undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourAcura dealer.

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

Ignition Switch

77

Page 81: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. If your car hasan automatic transmission, the shiftlever must also be in Park. The anti-theft lock will lock the steeringcolumn when you remove the key.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the car are usable.Several of the lights on the instru-ment panel come on as a test whenyou turn the ignition switch fromACCESSORY to ON.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key’s coding (see page

).

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power socket.

76

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

LOCK (0)

ON (II)

START (III)

ACCESSORY (I)

78

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

Page 82: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Each door has a lock tab at the top ofthe door. When you push down thelock tab on the driver’s door, bothdoors and the hatch lock. Pulling upthe lock tab on the driver’s door onlyunlocks that door. The lock tab onthe passenger’s door only locks andunlocks that door.

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the car, push the locktab down and close the door. To lockthe driver’s door, pull the inside oroutside door handle and push thelock tab down. Release the handle,then close the door.

Both doors and the hatch can belocked from the outside by using thekey in either door.

To unlock only the driver’s doorfrom the outside, insert the key inthe driver’s door lock, turn the keyand release it. If you turn the keyand hold it, both doors and the hatchwill unlock. Both doors and thehatch will unlock when you unlockthe passenger’s door with the key.

Door Locks

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls 79

LOCK TAB

KEY

Page 83: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Each door has a master door andhatch lock switch. Either switchlocks and unlocks both doors and thehatch. Push the switch down to lockboth doors and the hatch. Push up tounlock them.

To close the hatch, press down onthe back edge.

See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thehatch closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the hatchand to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

To open the hatch, pull the handle,then lift up the hatch.

The hatch will not lock or unlockwhen the battery is disconnected.

164

54

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

Power Door/Hatch Locks Hatch

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

80

MASTER DOOR AND HATCHLOCK SWITCH

Pull

Page 84: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

You can lock and unlock your carwith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, bothdoors and the hatch lock.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver’s door unlocks.The passenger’s door and the hatchunlock when you push the button asecond time. The parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights and licenseplate light flash twice.

If you unlock the doors and thehatch with the remote transmitter,but do not open either door or thehatch within 30 seconds, the doorsand the hatch automatically relockand the security system sets.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openeither door or the hatch, the lightwill go out in about 30 seconds andthe doors and the hatch willautomatically relock. If you relockthe doors and the hatch with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the light willgo off immediately.

You cannot lock the doors and thehatch with the remote transmitter ifany door or the hatch is not fullyclosed. You cannot lock or unlockthe doors and the hatch with the keyin the ignition switch.

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls 81

Page 85: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Panic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your vehicle’s horn andlights to attract attention. Whenactivated, the horn will sound, andthe headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights andinstrument panel lights will flash forabout 30 seconds. To activate panicmode, press and hold the PANICbutton for about one second.

To cancel Panic mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Panic mode will not activate if thekey is in the ON (II) position.

When the remote transmitter’sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors and thetailgate, and the LED will get dim.Replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Battery type: CR2025

To replace the battery, place a clothon the edge of the transmitter andremove the upper half by carefullyprying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.

Panic Mode Replacing the Battery

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls82

Page 86: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Remove the old battery and note thepolarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same ( sidefacing up), then insert it in thetransmitter.

Snap the two halves of thetransmitter case back together.

Avoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your vehicle’ssystem by your Acura dealer. Anyother transmitters you have will alsoneed to be reprogrammed.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

CONTINUED

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls

Transmitter Care

83

Page 87: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Open the glove box by pulling thebottom of the handle. Close it with afirm push. Lock or unlock the glovebox with the master key.

The glove box light comes on onlywhen the instrument panel lights areon.

U.S.:Canada:

All modelsPremium and Type-S modelsonly

Glove Box

Keys and Locks

Instruments and Controls84

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Page 88: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To change the angle of the seat-back,pull up on the lever on the outside ofthe seat bottom. Move the seat-backto the desired position and releasethe lever. Let the seat-back latch intothe new position.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 14

CONTINUED

Front Seat Adjustments

Seat Adjustments

Instruments and Controls 85

Page 89: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To get into the back seat on thedriver’s side, pull up on the seat-backadjustment lever.

Vary the lumbar support by movingthe lever on the right side of theseat-back.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. Turn the dial on theoutside of the seat cushion to changethe height of the seat bottom.

U.S.:Canada:

All models U.S.:Canada:

All modelsPremium and Type-S modelsonly

Premium and Type-S modelsonly

Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Driver’s Lumbar Support Rear Seat Access

Seat Adjustments

Instruments and Controls86

Page 90: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The back of the rear seat folds downto give you more cargo space. Eachside folds down separately. With onlyhalf the seat folded, you can stillcarry a passenger in the back seat.

To unlatch either side of the seat-back, pull up on the release tab.Move the seat belt out of the wayand fold the seat-back down.

To lock the seat-back upright, pushthe seat-back firmly against its latch.Tug on the seat-back to make sure itis latched.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard. Seeon page .

To get into the rear seat on thepassenger’s side, push down on therelease lever at the base of the seat-back. The seat-back will tilt forward,and the seat will slide forward toallow easier access to the rear seat.

164

Folding Rear Seat

Carrying Cargo

Seat Adjustments

Instruments and Controls 87

RELEASE TAB

RELEASE LEVER

Page 91: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

On Canadian models

Do not use the seat heaters when theengine is off or when idling for along period of time. They can drainthe battery, making your car hard tostart.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition switchmust be ON (II) to use them. Pushthe heater switch to turn the poweron or off. The indicators will comeon and remain on while the heatersare on.

Seat Heaters

Instruments and Controls88

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

Page 92: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The cargo area cover may be re-moved to give you more cargo room.

Open the hatch.

Push up on the sides of the cargoarea cover to release the coverfrom the hooks.

Pull down on the cover to removethe mounting pins from the holesin the hatch lining.

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Cargo Area Cover

Instruments and Controls 89

MOUNTING PINHOOK

Page 93: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Reverse this procedure to install thecargo area cover.

There is a reference line on thecargo area side panel. To avoiddamaging the cargo cover, remove itif the cargo goes above that line.

Do not place items on the cargo areacover, or stack objects higher thanthe top of the back seat. They couldblock your view and be thrown aboutthe vehicle during a crash or suddenstop.

Your car’s windows are electrically-powered. Turn the ignition switch toON (II) to raise or lower eitherwindow.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pulling back on theswitch and holding it.

Power Windows

Instruments and Controls

Cargo Area Cover, Power Windows

90

REFERENCE

Page 94: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The driver’s armrest has a masterpower window control panel. Toopen the passenger’s window, pushdown on the switch and hold it untilthe window reaches the desiredposition. To close the window, pullback on the window switch. Releasethe switch when the window gets tothe position you want.

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

CONTINUED

AUTO

Power Windows

Instruments and Controls 91

MAIN SWITCH

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

Page 95: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

If the driver’s window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will stop, and thenreverse direction. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the driver’s windowfuse is removed, the AUTO functionwill be disabled. The power windowsystem needs to be reset afterreconnecting the battery or installingthe fuse. You should do the following.

Start the engine. Push down onthe driver’s window switch untilthe window is fully open.

Pull back on the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourcar checked by a Honda dealer.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passenger’s window. With thisswitch off, the passenger’s windowcannot be raised or lowered. TheMAIN switch does not affect the driv-er’s window. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in the carso they do not injure themselves byoperating the window unintentionally.The lights inside the switches comeon when you turn the parking lightsor headlights on and the ignitionswitch is ON (II).

1.

2.

Auto Reverse

Power Windows

Instruments and Controls92

Page 96: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Use the switch on the dashboard toopen and close the moonroof. Theignition switch must be ON (II).Push and hold the switch toopen the moonroof. Release theswitch when the moonroof reachesthe desired position. To close themoonroof, press and hold the

switch.

U.S.:Canada:

All modelsPremium and Type-S modelsonly

Instruments and Controls

Moonroof

93

Closing the moonroof onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure passengers areclear of the moonroof beforeclosing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

Page 97: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment switch on the left side ofthe dashboard:

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

Instruments and Controls94

TAB

SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Page 98: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased (see page ).

The outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

61

Canada: Premium and Type-S modelsonly

Parking Brake

Instruments and Controls

Mirrors, Parking Brake

95

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON PARKING BRAKE LEVER Driving the car with the parking brakeapplied can damage the rear brakesand axles.

Page 99: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

To use this coat hook, rotate thehook down. Close it with a firm push.

Vanity Mirror, Coat Hook

Vanity Mirror Coat Hook

Instruments and Controls96

Page 100: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

To open the beverage holder, pushthe left knob and slide the coverforward.

The beverage holders for the rearseat passenger’s are located in thearmrests.

CONTINUED

Beverage Holder

Instruments and Controls 97

Push

Page 101: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To open the console compartment,push the right knob and slide thecover forward.

Another beverage holder is locatedin the center console behind theparking brake lever.

Beverage Holder, Console Compartment

Instruments and Controls

Console Compartment

98

Push

Page 102: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

They will not power an automotivetype cigarette lighter element.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

To power an accessory, the ignitionswitch must be in ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II).

There are two accessory powersockets, one is located in the front ofthe center console. The other islocated at the rear of the console. Touse either power socket, pull up thecover.

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the centerposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open either door. After thedoors are closed tightly, the lightdims slightly, then fades out in about30 seconds. In the ON position, theceiling light stays on continuously.

U.S. :Canada :

Standard on all modelsRear power socket optional

Instruments and Controls

Accessory Power Socket, Interior Lights

Accessory Power Socket Ceiling Light

99

DOOR ACTIVATED

Page 103: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The cargo area light comes on whenyou open the hatch.

Turn on the spotlight by pushing thebutton next to each light. Push thebutton again to turn it off. You canuse the spotlights at all times.

U.S.:Canada:

All modelsPremium and Type-S modelsonly

Instruments and Controls

Interior Lights

Spotlights Cargo Area Light

100

Page 104: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

.....................Heating and Cooling . 102...............Temperature Sensors . 108

Audio System (All models......................except Type-S) . 109

....AM/FM/CD Audio System . 109.................Operating the Radio . 109.................Adjusting the Sound . 113

..............................Digital Clock . 114............Audio System Lighting . 115

.........Operating the CD Player . 115.....Operating the CD Changer . 117....CD Player Error Indications . 119

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 120

Operating the Cassette.....................................Player . 121

............Tape Search Functions . 123.................Caring for Cassettes . 124................Audio System (Type S) . 125

AM/FM/Cassette/.CD Changer Audio System . 125

.................Operating the Radio . 126

.................Adjusting the Sound . 129..............................Digital Clock . 130

............Audio System Lighting . 131....................Radio Frequencies . 131

........................Radio Reception . 131Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 133............Tape Search Functions . 134

Caring for the Cassette.....................................Player . 137

Loading CDs in the.................................Changer . 139

...................................Operation . 141Removing CDs from the

.................................Changer . 143.......Protecting Compact Discs . 145

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 146

.......................Theft Protection . 147............................Security System . 148

...............................Cruise Control . 149

Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 101

Page 105: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The engine must be running for theheater and air conditioning togenerate hot and cold air. The heateruses engine coolant to warm the air.If the engine is cold, it will be severalminutes before you feel warm aircoming from the system.

The heating and cooling systemdraws air through the exterior ventsat the bottom of the windshield.Keep these vents clear of leaves andother debris.

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.Open each vent by pushing on therecess. Adjust the direction of airflow by rotating the vent.

The heating and cooling system inyour Acura has full heating,ventilation, and air conditioningcapabilities. In combination with theair conditioning, the systemmaintains the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and air flow directionautomatically depending on the settemperature.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Heating and Cooling

102

SIDE VENTSCENTER VENTS

Page 106: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Your car has a flow-through venti-lation system. Air enters the carthrough vents in front of the wind-screen. It circulates through theinterior then exits through ventsnear the tailgate. This system pro-vides fresh air even when the car isstanding still. To bring in outside air,select the Fresh Air mode. Set thefan at a comfortable speed.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Ventilation

Heating and Cooling

103

Page 107: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To use the heating and coolingsystem in automatic mode, set thesystem as follows.

Set the fan control dial to AUTO.

Set the mode control dial to AUTO.

Turn the temperature control dialto the desired temperature.

Select Fresh Air mode by pressingthe Recirculation button. Theindicator in the switch should beoff.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton.

Turning the fan control dial to OFFshuts the heating and cooling systemcompletely off. Keep the systemcompletely off only for short periods.To keep stale air and mustiness fromcollecting, you should have the fanrunning at all times.

To heat or cool the interior faster,select Recirculation mode and setthe temperature control dial to theupper or lower limit.

The system runs of full cooling orheating only. It does not regulate theinterior temperature. When thetemperature is set between the lowerand upper limits, the systemregulates the interior temperature tothe set value.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Heating and Cooling

Automatic Operation

Comfort and Convenience Features104

FAN CONTROL DIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

MODE CONTROL DIAL

Page 108: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set the dial belowthe outside air temperature.With A/C on, use the temperaturecontrol dial to adjust the temperatureof the air flow to a comfortablesetting.

Air conditioning also removes mois-ture from the air as it operates. Youcan use it to defog the windowsquickly in cool or damp weather.Used in combination with the heater,it also makes the interior warm anddry.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

) when using the A/C in heavytraffic or driving up long hills. If itmoves near the red zone, turn off theair conditioning until the gaugereads normally.

You can manually set the systemcontrols for ventilation, air condi-tioning, heating, air flow direction,and fan speed in various combination.

Pressing the A/C button turns theair conditioning ON and OFF. Theindicator in the button lights whenthe A/C is ON.

67

Comfort and Convenience Features

Manual Operation

Heating and Cooling

Air Conditioning Button

105

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

Page 109: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This button controls the source of airgoing into the system. When theindicator in this button is lit, thesystem is recirculating the interiorair (Recirculation mode). When theindicator is off, fresh air is broughtin from outside the vehicle (FreshAir mode). Push the button tochange between recirculated andfresh air.

Use Recirculation mode to heat orcool the interior more quickly, or tokeep out smoke and dust. Leavingthe system in the Recirculation modewith the A/C off can cause thewindows to fog up. Switch to FreshAir mode as soon as the interiorreaches a comfortable temperatureor the outside smoky, dusty condi-tion clears.

You can manually select the fanspeed by turning the fan speedcontrol dial. Turning this dialclockwise increases the fan speed,which increases air flow.

Some air will come out of the sidevents in all modes.

Use this dial to select the direction ofair flow coming out of the system.

When the dial is set to AUTO, thesystem controls the fan speedautomatically.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Heating and Cooling

Recirculation Button

Fan Speed Mode Control Dial

106

FAN CONTROL DIAL MODE CONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

Page 110: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

The main air flow comes outof the dashboard vents.

The main air flow is directedto the floor vents.

In AUTO mode, the system controlsthe air flow direction automaticallybetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents anddefroster vents at the base of thewindshield.

The main air flow is directedto the windshield for faster defrost-ing or defogging. To defrost or defogmore quickly, turn the temperaturecontrol dial to maximum. Select

and set the fan speed to high.

If there is actual frost on the win-dows, first select the Recirculationmode. If the windows are fogged,select the Fresh Air mode. Warmedair will then flow from the wind-shield and side defroster vents.

When you select or ,the A/C turns on automatically tohelp dehumidify the air and defogthe windshield. When you selectanother mode, the A/C stays on. Ifyou do not want to use the A/C inthat mode, press the button to turn itoff.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Heating and Cooling

107

Page 111: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The heating and cooling system hastemperature sensors located next tothe steering column and in the top ofthe dashboard. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Temperature Sensors

Heating and Cooling

Comfort and Convenience Features108

Page 112: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume byturning the same knob.

Your Acura’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thevehicle’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).147

All models except Type-S

Audio System

AM/FM/CD Audio System

Operating the Radio

Comfort and Convenience Features 109

Page 113: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

- -

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob clockwise to tune to ahigher frequency, orcounterclockwise to tune to a lowerfrequency.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset buttons.

To change the frequency rapidly,press and hold the top or bottom ofthe SEEK bar. Release the bar whenthe display reaches the desiredfrequency. Depending on which partof the bar you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressand release the top or bottom of theSEEK bar. Depending on which partof the bar you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. The system will scanup the band for a station with astrong signal. When it finds one, itwill stop and play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

TUNE

SEEK SCAN

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features110

Page 114: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

To store a frequency:

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properpreset button to tune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Preset

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 111

AM/FM BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR

SCAN INDICATOR

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE/MODE KNOB

AUTOSELECTBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

Page 115: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

- If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

AUTO SELECT

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features112

Page 116: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

For information, see page .

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE/MODE knob. The modechanges from BAS to TRE to FAD toBAL, and then back to the selectedaudio mode, each time you press theTUNE/MODE knob.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE/MODE knob. Adjust theBalance or Fader to your liking byturning the TUNE/MODE knob.The level number on the displayshows you the range.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE/MODE knob. Adjust the desiredmode by turning the TUNE/MODEknob. The level number on thedisplay shows you the range.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE/MODE knob.

131

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Radio Frequencies and Reception

Treble/Bass

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 113

LEVEL NUMBER INDICATOR

TUNE/MODE KNOB

Page 117: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To set the hours, press and hold theCLOCK button. Press and hold theH button until the numbers advanceto the desired time.

To set the minutes, press and holdthe CLOCK button. Press and holdthe M button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

1:06 would RESET to 1:001:52 would RESET to 2:00

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the time setting will belost. To set the time again, follow thesetting procedure.

The audio system usually shows thetime when the ignition switch is inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Itshows the operation mode of theradio, CD player, or optional CDchanger when you operate them,then goes back to the time displayafter three seconds.

You can use the RESET button toquickly set the time to the nearesthour. Press the RESET button whilepressing the CLOCK button. If thedisplayed time is before the halfhour, pressing RESET sets the clockback to the previous hour. If thedisplayed time is after the half hour,pressing RESET sets the clockforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

For example :

Digital Clock

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features114

CLOCK BUTTON

M BUTTON

RESET BUTTONH BUTTON

Page 118: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust the il-lumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

With the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insertthe disc into the CD slot. Push thedisc in halfway, the drive will pull itin the rest of the way and begin toplay. The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. Playonly standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play the disc again.

70

Operating the CD Player

Audio System Lighting

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 115

CD/TAPE BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON CD SLOT

REPEAT INDICATOR

RPT BUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

RDM BUTTON

RANDOM INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PWR/VOL KNOB

Page 119: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM/FM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Pressthe side to move forward. Youwill see CUE in the display. Press the

side to move backward. Youwill see REW displayed. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar,

the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe side to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to skip to the beginning ofthe previous track.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features116

Page 120: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

+ -

+-

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressthe RDM button. You will see RDMin the display. The system will thenselect and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again.

A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your car. It holds up to six discs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.

To select a different disc, press theDISC (Preset 6) or DISC(Preset 5) button. The next disc inthe changer is loaded and playedwhen you press the DISC button.DISC loads and plays the previousdisc. If you select an empty slot inthe magazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

Operating the CD Changer(Optional)

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 117

Page 121: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (AM or FM) with the FM orAM button.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.145

Protecting Compact Discs

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features118

Page 122: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

IndicationIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourAcura dealer.

SolutionCause

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Acura dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature.

CD Player Error Indications

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 119

Page 123: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

IndicationIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourAcura dealer.

SolutionCause

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Acura dealer.Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Acura dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDmagazine

Mechanical Error

High Temperature.

No CD magazine in theCD changer.

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features120

Page 124: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andauto-reverse for continuous play.

Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Operating the Cassette Player(Optional)

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 121

AM/FM BUTTON

CD/TAPE BUTTON NR BUTTON

RPT BUTTON

FF BUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

REW BUTTON

Page 125: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noisereduction, turn it off by pressing theNR button.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton on the cassette player.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the cassette player will be inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe PLAY/PROG button.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD/TAPE button. Tochange back to the cassette player,press the CD/TAPE button.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features122

Page 126: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

--With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

The Skip function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To activate SKIP, pressthe SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the

side to advance to thebeginning of the next song orpassage, or the side to return tothe beginning of the current song orpassage. FF or REW will flash in thedisplay as the tape moves. When thesystem reaches the beginning of thenext song or passage (FF), or thebeginning of the current one (REW),it goes back to PLAY mode.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PROG/PLAY button totake the system out of rewind or fastforward. If the system reaches theend of the tape while in fast forwardor rewind, it automatically stops thatfunction, reverses direction, and be-gins to play.

Tape Search Functions SKIPFF/REW

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 123

Page 127: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

- The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

137

REPEAT Caring for Cassettes

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features124

Page 128: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thecar’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).

Your Acura’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andauto-reverse for continuous play.

The in-dash CD changer holds up tosix discs. You operate the CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. See page for CDchanger operation.

139147

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Type-S

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

AM/FM/Cassette/CD ChangerAudio System

125

Page 129: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

○ ○

- +

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob, or the AM or FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

You can use any of four methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or thePreset buttons.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, presseither SEEK button ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on whichSEEK button you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

TUNE

Operating the Radio

SEEK

SCAN

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features126

Page 130: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properPreset button to tune to it.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

To store a frequency:

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Preset

127

PWR/VOLKNOB

FMBUTTON

AMBUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE KNOB

SEEKBUTTONS

PRESET BUTTONSSCAN BUTTON

Page 131: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

- If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

AUTO SELECT

Comfort and Convenience Features

Audio System

128

A.SEL INDICATOR

A.SELBUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

PRESET BUTTONSSCAN BUTTON

Page 132: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE/MODE knob. The modechanges from BAS to TRE to FAD toBAL, and then back to the selectedaudio mode, each time you press theTUNE/MODE knob.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,

while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE/MODE knob. Adjust theBalance or Fader to your liking byturning the TUNE/MODE knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.

When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theTUNE/MODE knob.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE/MODE knob. Adjust the desiredmode by turning the TUNE/MODEknob.

The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass

129

LEVEL INDICATOR TUNE/MODE KNOB

Page 133: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The audio system display usuallyshows the time when the ignitionswitch is in ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II). It shows the operation mode ofthe radio, cassette player, or CDchanger when you operate them,then goes back to the time displayafter five seconds.

To set the hours, press and hold theCLOCK button. Press and hold theH (preset 4) button until thenumbers advance to the desired time. You can quickly set the time to the

nearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing andholding the clock button, thenpressing the RESET button (preset6) sets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, the clock is setforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the time setting will belost. To set the time again, follow thesetting procedure.

For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00To set the minutes, press and hold

the CLOCK button. Press and holdthe M (preset 5) button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.

Digital Clock

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features130

CLOCK BUTTON

RESET BUTTON

H BUTTON M BUTTON

Page 134: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust the il-lumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator will

go off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

How well your Acura’s radio receivesstations is dependent on manyfactors, such as the distance fromthe station’s transmitter, nearbylarge objects, and atmosphericconditions.

Your Acura’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.

70

Audio System Lighting

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 131

Page 135: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features132

Page 136: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio or CDchanger while listening to a tape,press the AM, FM or CD button. Tochange back to the cassette player,press the TAPE button.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. The indi-cator will light in the display. If thetape was not recorded with Dolbynoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the button.Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.

You can remove the cassette withthe ignition switch in any position,even if the audio system is turned off.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

Operating the Cassette Player

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 133

Page 137: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

Fast Forward andRewind move the tape rapidly. Torewind the tape, push the REWbutton. You will see REW in thedisplay. To fast forward the tape,push the FF button. You will see FFdisplayed. Press the FF, REW orPLAY button to take the system outof rewind or fast forward. When thesystem reaches the end of the tape,it reverses direction and begins toplay.

Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features134

PWR/VOL KNOB TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

CASSETTE SLOT

DOLBY INDICATOR

TAPE EJECTBUTTON

CDBUTTON

TAPE BUTTON

DOLBY BUTTON

FF BUTTON

REWBUTTON

PROG BUTTON

PLAYBUTTON

FM BUTTON

AMBUTTON

Page 138: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

○ ○

- +

The SKIP function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the button. You willsee REW flashing in the display asthe tape rewinds. To skip to thebeginning of the next song, push the

button. You will see FF flashing inthe display as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds the begin-ning of a song or passage, it goesback to PLAY.

To stop the SKIP function before itfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, press either of the SKIPbuttons ( or ).

SKIP

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 135

REPEAT INDICATOR

RPT BUTTON

REW BUTTON

FF BUTTON

SKIP BUTTONS

Page 139: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

- The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.Pressing the REW or FF button, oreither of the SKIP buttons, also turnsoff REPEAT.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

REPEAT

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features136

Page 140: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

If you see the error indication‘‘ ’’ on the display, press theEJECT button to remove thecassette from the unit. Make surethe tape is not damaged. If thecassette will not eject or the errorindication stays on after the cassetteejects, take the car to your Acuradealer.

If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.

Caring for the Cassette Player

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 137

Page 141: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Load and play only standard rounddiscs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam inthe drive or cause other problems.You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Your Acura’s audio system has an in-dash CD changer that holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio andcassette player.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

Operating the CD Changer

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features138

LOAD BUTTON CD SLOT

CD EJECT BUTTON

SKIP BUTTONS

CD BUTTONRDM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

Page 142: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the Load buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, and you do notpress the Load button, the systemwill wait for ten seconds, then stopthe load operation and begin playingthe last CD loaded.

To load a single CD:

Press and release the Load button.

The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.

When the disc number for anempty position starts to blink andthe green CD Loaded indicatorcomes on, you will see LOAd inthe display. Insert the disc into theCD slot. Insert it only abouthalfway, the drive will pull it in therest of the way.

Press and hold the Load buttonuntil you see ‘‘LOAd’’ in thedisplay, then release the button.

On the upper left side of thedisplay, the disc number for anempty position will begin blinkingand the green CD Loadedindicator will come on.

Insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD Loaded indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

When LOAd appears again in thedisplay, insert the next disc intothe CD slot.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

Loading CDs in the Changer

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 139

Page 143: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you press the Load button while aCD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate presetbutton. Select an empty position (theCD Loaded indicator is off), andpress the preset button for thatposition (1 to 6). The system willstop playing the current CD and startthe loading sequence. It will thenplay the CD just loaded.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features140

LOAD BUTTON

CD LOADEDINDICATOR

AMBUTTON

CD SLOTINDICATOR

CD SLOT

FM BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS TAPE BUTTON

Page 144: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

○○

+-

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘Cd’’ inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate Preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will go intothe loading sequence (see page ).

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay as a reminder. The systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing either of theSKIP buttons also turns off therepeat feature.

This feature,when activated, plays the trackswithin a CD in random order, ratherthan in the order they are recordedon the CD. To activate Random Play,press the RDM button. You will seeRDM in the display. The system willthen select and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again, or you select adifferent CD with a preset button.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the appropriate SKIPbutton. You will hear a beep and thesystem will continue to move. Pressthe button to move forward, orthe button to move backward.Release the button when the systemreaches the point you want.

Each time you press the buttonand release it, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release thebutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressand release it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

146

Operation REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 141

Page 145: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM or FM button, or inserta cassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe TAPE button. When you returnto CD mode by pressing the CDbutton, play will continue at the samepoint that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features142

PWR/VOLKNOB

FM BUTTON

AM BUTTON

RDM INDICATOR

CD BUTTON

RPT INDICATOR

TAPEBUTTON

SKIPBUTTONS

PRESET BUTTONSRPT BUTTON

RDMBUTTON

Page 146: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. Whenyou remove the disc from the slot,the system automatically begins theLoad sequence so you can loadanother CD in that position. If you donot load another CD, after tenseconds the system begins playingthe next disc in the changer. If thechanger is empty, the system selectsthe previous mode (AM, FM, orTape).

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 15 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatCD begins playing, press the ejectbutton.

Removing CDs from the Changer

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 143

CD SLOT CD EJECT BUTTON

CD BUTTON

Page 147: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you press the Eject button whilelistening to the radio or tape, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe Eject button again will eject thenext disc in the numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

In any mode, if you press the ejectbutton and hold it until you hear abeep, the system will eject all of thediscs in the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first. Youcan eject up to six discs, one at atime.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features144

Page 148: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Protecting Compact Discs

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 145

Page 149: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

IndicationIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourAcura dealer.

SolutionCause

Consult your Acura dealer.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Consult your Acura dealer.

Disc-changermalfunction.High Temperature.

Disc-changermalfunction.

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features

CD Changer Error Indications

146

Page 150: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the radio fuse isremoved, the audio system willdisable itself. If this happens, youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay the next time you turn on thesystem. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code. If it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system’s serial number inthis Owner’s Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourHonda dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

Your car’s audio system will disableitself if it is disconnected fromelectrical power for any reason. Tomake it work again, the user mustenter a specific five-digit code in thePreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

Only on U.S. modelTheft Protection

Audio System

Comfort and Convenience Features 147

Page 151: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Once the security system is set,opening either door (without usingthe key or the remote transmitter),or the hood, will cause it to alarm. Italso alarms if the radio is removedfrom the dashboard or the wiring iscut.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system sets auto-matically fifteen seconds after youlock the doors, hood, and hatch. Thesecurity system indicator on theinstrument panel starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, hatch, or either door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door Open Indicator onthe instrument panel (see page ),to see if the doors are fully closed.Since they are not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood and hatch.

The security system helps to protectyour car and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourcar or remove the radio. This alarmcontinues for two minutes, then thealarm stops. To reset an alarmingsystem before the two minutes haveelapsed, unlock either door with thekey or the remote transmitter.

61

Security System

Comfort and Convenience Features148

SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT

Page 152: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the car underthose conditions. 1.

2.

U.S.:Canada:

All modelsPremium and Type-Smodels only

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

Using the Cruise Control

149

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCHImproper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Page 153: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Press and release the SET/decelbutton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

3.

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features150

RESUME/accel

CANCEL

SET/decel

Page 154: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in either of two ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/accel button. The car willaccelerate. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in either of two ways:

Press and hold the SET/decelbutton. The car will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The carwill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal will cause the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the SET/decel button.The car will then maintain thedesired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/decelbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your car will slow downabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/accel button repeatedly. Each timeyou do this, your car will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/decelbutton.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features 151

Page 155: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to

.Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressthe RESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light comes on,and the car will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, theCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out and thecar will begin to slow down. You canuse the accelerator pedal in thenormal way.

Cancelling the Cruise Control

Using theCruise Control

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features152

Page 156: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Before you begin driving your Acura,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your car,please read the information in thissection first.

.....................General Precautions . 154.............................Break-in Period . 155

.........................................Gasoline . 155.........Service Station Procedures . 156

................Filling the Fuel Tank . 156....................Opening the Hood . 157

...............................Oil Check . 159.........Engine Coolant Check . 160

...............................Fuel Economy . 161.....................Vehicle Condition . 161

...........................Driving Habits . 161...Accessories and Modifications . 162

.............................Carrying Cargo . 164

Before Driving

Before Driving 153

Page 157: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Curbs and steep inclines coulddamage the front and rearbumpers. Low curbs that do notaffect the average car may be highenough to hit the bumper on yourAcura. The front or rear bumpermay scrape when trying to driveonto an incline, such as a steepdriveway or trailer ramps.

Use caution if you should driveyour car on very rough or ruttedroads. You could damage thesuspension and underbody bybottoming out. Going too fast overparking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ canalso cause damage.

Your Acura is designed to give youoptimum handling and performanceon well-maintained roads. As part ofthis design, your car has a minimumof ground clearance.

Type-S model

General Precautions

Before Driving154

Page 158: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km). In Canada, some gasolines contain

an octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emissions control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Acura dealer for service.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

Your Acura is designed to operate onunleaded gasoline.

Help assure your car’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your car’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause occasional metallic knockingnoises in the engine and will result indecreased engine performance.

Use a premium unleaded gasolinewith a pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

Use an unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 86 or higher.Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause a persistent, heavy metallicrapping noise in the engine that canlead to mechanical damage.

(Type-S)

(All models except Type-S)Break-in Period Gasoline

Break-in Period, Gasoline

Before Driving 155

Page 159: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver’s side of the car, park withthat side closest to the servicestation pumps.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Put the attachment on the fuel fillcap into the slit on the fuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Your car has an on-board refuelingvapor recovery system to help keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. If the fuel nozzle keepsclicking off even though the tank isnot full, there may be a problem withthis system. Consult your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Filling the Fuel Tank

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving156

FUEL FILL CAP

Pull

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Page 160: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

To find the hood latch handle, putyour fingers under the front edgeof the hood just to left of center.Lift up the hood latch handle untilit releases the hood. Lift the hood.

1. 2.

5.

6.

276

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Opening the Hood

157

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH

Page 161: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop.

After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole onthe left side of the hood.

If you can open the hood withoutlifting the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

3.

224

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving158

SUPPORT ROD

Page 162: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the car with fuel. Wait a fewminutes after turning the engine offbefore you check the oil.

2. 3.

1.

CONTINUED

Oil Check

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving 159

Page 163: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourAcura.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

4.

207

205

212

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Adding Oil

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving160

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

RESERVE TANK

MAX

MIN

Page 164: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try tocombine several short trips into one.

You can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

Always maintain your car accordingto the maintenance schedule. Thiswill keep it in top operating condition.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the

(see page ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour car’s underside adds weight androlling resistance. Frequent cleaninghelps your fuel mileage and reducesthe chance of corrosion.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your car uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

The condition of your car and yourdriving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

205

Vehicle Condition

Driving Habits

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Before Driving

Fuel Economy

161

Page 165: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ).

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Before installing any accessory:

Have the installer contact yourAcura dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

Modifying your car, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake your car unsafe. Before youmake any modifications or add anyaccessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize your car.These accessories have beendesigned and approved for your car,and are covered by warranty.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your car’scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour car’s electrical system capacity,they can interfere with the operation

of your car, or even cause theairbags to deploy.

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper car operation orperformance.

Non-Acura accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your car, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your car’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information.)

280

163

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving162

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourcar’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Page 166: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Acuraseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Acura (aftermarket) componentscould seriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:Lowering the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to impact speedbumps or other raised objects,which could cause the airbags todeploy.

Raising the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Aftermarket wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult with your Acura dealer.

Modifications

Additional Safety Precautions

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

163

Page 167: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Your car has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

The glove box, and the pockets inthe doors and on the passenger’sseat-back are designed for small,lightweight items. The cargo area isintended for larger, heavier items. Inaddition, the back seat can be foldeddown to allow you to carry morecargo or longer items.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour car’s handling, stability, andoperation, and make it unsafe.Before carrying any type of cargo, besure to read the following pages.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving164

Page 168: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, accessories,and the tongue weight if you aretowing a trailer.

To figure out how much cargo youcan carry:

Add up the weight of all occupants.

If you are towing a trailer, add thetongue weight to the numberabove.

The final number is the total weightof cargo you can carry.

Subtract the total from 700 lbs(325 kg).

The maximum load for your car is700 lbs (325 kg).

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 165

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Page 169: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thehatch, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page .

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Acuradealer for further information.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the car during a crash orsudden stop.

Do not place items on the cargoarea cover, or stack objects higherthan the top of the back seat. Theycould block your view and bethrown about the car during acrash or sudden stop.

49

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving166

Page 170: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate the5-speed and 6-speed manualtransmissions and automatictransmission. It also the includesimportant information on parkingyour car, the braking system, andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 168.......................Starting the Engine . 169

Starting in Cold Weather....................at High Altitude . 169

5-speed and 6-speed.........Manual Transmissions . 170

.....Recommended Shift Points . 171..............Engine Speed Limiter . 171

.......................Reverse Lockout . 172..............Automatic Transmission . 173

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 173................Shift Lever Positions . 173..............Engine Speed Limiter . 178

....................Shift Lock Release . 179...........................................Parking . 180

.....................The Braking System . 181.............Brake Wear Indicators . 181

...............Brake System Design . 182.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 182

Important Safety.........................Reminders . 183........................ABS Indicator . 183

...............Driving in Bad Weather . 184...........................Towing a Trailer . 186

Driving

Driving 167

Page 171: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check the adjustment of the seat(see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage ).

Check that the hood and hatch arefully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your car.

Make sure the doors and hatchare securely closed and locked.

1.

2.

3.9.

8.

7.

6.

5.

4.

10.

11.

12.

16

86

95

74

169

59

Preparing to Drive

Driving168

Page 172: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again. An engine is harder to start in cold

weather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet

(2,400 meters) adds to the problem.Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway. START (III) does notfunction unless the clutch pedal isdepressed.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Starting the Engine

Driving

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)

169

Page 173: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse. When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer’s red zone in thelower gear.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the car moving. Pushdown the clutch pedal, and pause fora few seconds before shifting intoReverse, or shift into one of theforward gears for a moment. Thisstops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’

Driving

5-speed and 6-speed Manual Transmissions

170

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

Page 174: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

7 mph (11 km/h)23 mph (37 km/h)33 mph (53 km/h)45 mph (72 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

14 mph (23 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)49 mph (79 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

14 mph (23 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)49 mph (79 km/h)54 mph (87 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

7 mph (11 km/h)23 mph (37 km/h)33 mph (53 km/h)45 mph (72 km/h)50 mph (80 km/h)

Cruise from acceleration

Cruise from acceleration

5-speed

5-speed

6-speed

6-speed

Driving

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

5-speed and 6-speed Manual Transmissions

171

Page 175: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The 6-speed manual transmissionhas an electric lockout so you cannotaccidentally shift from Fifth toReverse instead of Sixth. If youcannot shift to Reverse when the caris stopped:

If you are still unable to shift toReverse, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key toACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Depress the clutch pedal and shiftto Reverse.

With the clutch pedal still de-pressed, start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to Reverse, your car may bedeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Acura dealer.

With the clutch pedal depressed,move the shift lever to the First/Second gear side of the Neutralgate, then shift to Reverse.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Driving

5-speed and 6-speed Manual Transmissions

Reverse Lockout

172

Page 176: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The shift lever has five positions. Itmust be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD, D , N, R or the manual mode,press firmly on the brake pedal andkeep your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Your Acura’s transmission has fiveforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

This indicator on the instrumentpanel shows which position the shiftlever is in.The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If it flashesat any time (in any shift position), itindicates a possible problem in thetransmission. Avoid rapidacceleration and have thetransmission checked by anauthorized Acura dealer as soon aspossible.

3

CONTINUED

Shift Lever Position Indicator Shift Lever Positions

Automatic Transmission

Driving 173

SHIFT LEVER

Page 177: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To shift from:P to R

R to NN to DD to DD to DD to NN to RR to P

Do this:Press the brake pedal, thenmove the shift lever.

Move the lever.3

3

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.

You cannot shift out of Park with thebrake pedal depressed when theignition switch is in LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I).

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Move the shiftlever to the side to shift out of thePark position.

178

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Park (P)

174

Page 178: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

- -

-To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift.

Your car has a reverse lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift toReverse from Neutral or any otherdriving position when the car speedexceeds 5 6 mph (8 10 km/h).

If you cannot shift to Reverse whenthe car is stopped, press the brakepedal and slowly shift to Neutral, andthen to Reverse.

If there is a problem in the reverselockout system, or your car’s batteryis disconnected or goes dead, youcannot shift to Reverse. (Refer toShift Lock Release on page ).

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the car forany reason. Press on the brake pedalwhen you are moving the shift leverfrom Neutral to another gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.

This position is simi-lar to D, except only the first threegears are selected. Use D whentowing a trailer in hilly terrain, or toprovide engine braking when goingdown a steep hill. D can also keepthe transmission from cycling third,fourth and fifth gears in stop-and-godriving.

For faster acceleration when in D orD, you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down one,two or three gears, depending onyour speed.

178

3

3

3

Reverse (R) Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Drive (D )3

Automatic Transmission

Driving 175

Page 179: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Withthe shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position, youcan select the Sequential SportShiftMode to shift gears; much like amanual transmission, but without aclutch pedal.

When you accelerate away from astop, the transmission will be in firstgear. The transmission will notautomatically upshift. Watch thetachometer and upshift manuallybefore the engine reaches redline.

The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). Thereis no automatic downshift when youpush the accelerator pedal to thefloor.

To enter the Sequential SportShiftMode, move the shift lever further tothe driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D’’,move the shift lever to thepassenger’s side.

When you move the shift lever from‘‘D’’ to the Sequential SportShiftmode, the display shows the selectedgear.

In Sequential SportShift mode, eachtime you push forward on the shiftlever the transmission will shift to ahigher gear. Pull back on the lever todownshift. The number of the gearselected is displayed on theinstrument panel (see page ).227

Sequential SportShift Mode

Automatic Transmission

Driving176

Up shift

Down shift

Page 180: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

→ --→ --

→→

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing or provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

If you try to manually downshift at aspeed that would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission will not downshift.The gear indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to the higher gear.

If the car speed slows to below theredline of the selected lower gearposition while the indicator isflashing, the transmission willdownshift and the display will showthe selected lower gear.

The transmission will also shiftautomatically as the car comes to acomplete stop. It will downshift tofirst gear when the car speed isunder 6 mph (10 km/h).

The transmission may automaticallydownshift from the higher gear tothe lower gear under the followingconditions:

If you drive uphill between5 4 : 45 33 mph(72 52 km/h)4 3 : 33 20 mph(52 32 km/h)

The car speeds drops below5 4 : 33 mph (52 km/h)4 3 : 20 mph (32 km/h) The table shows the speed ranges

for upshifting and downshifting.

If you press the brake pedal as youdrive downhill.

To shift from

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

Speed range

over 0 mph(0 km/h)

over 6 mph(10 km/h)

over 20 mph(32 km/h)

over 33 mph(52 km/h)

Automatic Transmission

Driving 177

Page 181: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into thetachometer’s red zone. If thisoccurs, you may feel the enginecut in and out. This is caused by alimiter in the engine’s computercontrols. The engine will runnormally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

When you are in SequentialSportshift mode, and the vehicle isstopped, push forward on the shiftlever to shift to second gear. You willsee ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting out insecond gear will help to reducewheelspin in deep snow or on aslippery surface.

To shift from

2 1

3 2

4 3

5 4

Speed range

under 31 mph(50 km/h)

under 63 mph(100 km/h)

under 94 mph(150 km/h)

under 131 mph(210 km/h)

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Engine Speed LimiterStarting in Second Gear

178

Page 182: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your car isdeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Acura dealer.

Remove the screwdriver from theshift lock release slot, then installa new cover.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

Insert a small screwdriver in theShift Lock Release slot.

Push down on the key while youmove the shift lever out of Park toNeutral.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal does not work.

Set the Parking brake.

Make sure the ignition switch is inLOCK (0) position.

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or small metalplate (neither are included in thetool kit) to remove the cover.Carefully pry on the edge of thecover.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

6.

Shift Lock Release

Automatic Transmission

Driving 179

SHIFT LOCKRELEASE SLOT

Page 183: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your car. The indicator onthe instrument panel shows that theparking brake is not fully released; itdoes not indicate that the parkingbrake is firmly set. Make sure theparking brake is set firmly or yourcar may roll if it is parked on anincline.

If your car has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the car frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission making it easier tomove the shift lever out of Parkwhen you want to drive away.

If the car is facing uphill, turn thefront wheels away from the curb. Ifyou have a manual transmission, putit in first gear.

If the car is facing downhill, turn thefront wheels toward the curb. If youhave a manual transmission, put it inreverse gear.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Lock the doors.

Parking Tips

Parking

Driving180

Page 184: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic‘‘screeching’’ sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. They make avery audible ‘‘screeching.’’

Your Acura is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System

Driving 181

Page 185: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Your car has an Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS) as standardequipment. ABS helps to prevent thewheels from locking up and skiddingduring hard braking, allowing you toretain steering control.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the car continuesstraight ahead even though you turnthe steering wheel. The ABS helps toprevent lock-up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly; much faster than aperson can do it.

this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal; it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

U.S.:Canada:

All modelsPremium and Type-Smodels only

Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump thebrake pedal;

The Braking System

Driving182

Front

Page 186: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

itonly helps with steering controlduring braking. You should alwaysmaintain a safe following distancefrom other vehicles.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your car to veer intooncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage ). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your car as soon as possible.

61

Important Safety Reminders ABS IndicatorABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop the car;

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

The Braking System

Driving 183

ABS INDICATOR

U.S. indicator shown

Page 187: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

-- Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defrosters and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepage ).

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Rain, fog, and snow conditionsrequire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your car well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in theseconditions.

Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your car longer toreact, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills. 107

VisibilityDriving Technique

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving184

Page 188: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

- Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Traction

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving 185

Page 189: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Your Acura has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

The totalweight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towinga load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

Total Trailer Weight:

Load Limits

Tongue Load:

Towing a Trailer

Driving186

Page 190: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, thetongue load must not exceed:

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

on the front axle

on the rear axle

and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Towing a Trailer

Driving 187

3,660 lbs (1,660 kg)

1,950 lbs (885 kg)

1,775 lbs (805 kg)

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Page 191: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains. Make surethey are secured to both the trailerand hitch, and that they cross underthe tongue so they can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let the chains drag on the ground.

Checking Loads Towing Equipment andAccessories

Hitches

Safety Chains

Towing a Trailer

Driving188

Page 192: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard. Since lighting and wiring vary in

trailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

If you use a converter, you can getthe connector and pins that matewith the connector in your vehiclefrom your Acura dealer.

Acura recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

Your vehicle has a trailer lightingconnector located behind the rightside panel in the cargo area. Refer tothe drawing above for the wiringcolor code and purpose of each pin.

Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

Driving 189

TAILLIGHT(RED/YELLOW)

LEFT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/RED)

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

GROUND(BLACK)

BACK UP LIGHT(GREEN)

BRAKE LIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

Page 193: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see page ).

235

187

Pre-Tow ChecklistAdditional Trailer Equipment

Towing a Trailer

Driving190

Page 194: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use D position whentowing a trailer on level roads. D isthe proper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.(See ‘‘ ’’ in the nextcolumn for additional gearinformation.)

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently between 3rd and 4thgears while going up a hill, shift toD .

3

3

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving on Hills

Making Turns and Braking Driving on Hills

Towing a Trailer

Driving 191

Page 195: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

bottom

Parking

Backing Up

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Towing a Trailer

Driving192

Page 196: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Acura, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Acuradealer.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your car wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 194.Important Safety Precautions . 195

.................Maintenance Schedule . 196...Required Maintenance Record . 203

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 205..............................Fluid Locations . 206

......................................Engine Oil . 207..................................Adding Oil . 207

....................Recommended Oil . 207..............................Synthetic Oil . 209

....................................Additives . 209.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 209

.............................Cooling System . 212............Adding Engine Coolant . 212

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 214....................Windshield Washers . 216

.......................Transmission Fluid . 217..........Automatic Transmission . 217

..............Manual Transmission . 219................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 219

............................Brake System . 220...........................Clutch System . 220

..............................Power Steering . 221.....................Air Cleaner Element . 222

....................................Hood Latch . 224

....................................Spark Plugs . 224..............................Replacement . 224............................Specifications . 226

...........................................Battery . 226.................................Wiper Blades . 229

..............Air Conditioning System . 231..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 232

.....................................Drive Belts . 234...............................................Tires . 235

......................................Inflation . 235..................................Inspection . 236

..............................Maintenance . 237.............................Tire Rotation . 238

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 239......................Wheels and Tires . 240

..........................Winter Driving . 240.............................Snow Tires . 241............................Tire Chains . 241

.............................................Lights . 242.....................Headlight Aiming . 244

........................Replacing Bulbs . 244...........................Storing Your Car . 252

306

Maintenance

Maintenance 193

Page 197: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by an Acuratechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Regularly maintaining your car is thebest way to protect your investment.Proper maintenance is essential toyour safety and the safety of yourpassengers. It will also reward youwith more economical, trouble-freedriving, and help reduce air pollution.

Maintenance

Maintenance Safety

194

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining this caror failing to correct a problembefore driving can cause acrash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Page 198: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

Before you begin any maintenance,make sure your car is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

195

Page 199: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have your carserviced and what things needattention. It is essential that you haveyour car serviced as scheduled toretain its high level of safety,dependability, and emissions controlperformance.

Avoid exceeding your car’s loadlimit. This puts excess stress onthe engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your car. The loadlimit is shown on the label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Operate your car on reasonableroads within the legal speed limit.

Drive your car regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourcar as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

Service your car according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions if you drive your carMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than 10miles (16 km) per trip.

Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.

Extensive idling or long periods ofstop-and-go driving.

155

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Which Schedule to Follow:

196

Page 200: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Acurarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Trailer towing, driving with a cartop carrier, or driving inmountainous conditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLYor NEVER, drive under a ‘‘severe’’condition, you should follow theMaintenance Schedule for NormalConditions.

U.S. Vehicles:

We recommend the use of genuineAcura parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Your authorized Acura dealer knowsyour car best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all the

receipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

Maintenance

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Canadian Owners

197

Page 201: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

*#

# #

Maintenance198

Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisyEvery 110,000 miles (176,000 km)Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)

Service the following items at the recommended intervals.

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

1016

2032

3048

4064

5080

6096

70112

80128

90144

100160

110176

120192

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, thenevery 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years

Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 8 years

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

Check engine oil and coolantReplace engine oilRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)Replace engine oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentVisually inspect the following items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots, suspension componentsDriveshaft boots, brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust system, fuel lines and connections

Inspect and adjust drive beltsReplace dust and pollen filterReplace transmission fluid

Replace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceInspect idle speed

Replace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

24 48 7212 36 60

M/TA/T

1:: 197

232

1

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

Page 202: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

--

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□

□□□

□□

Maintenance 199

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A, B, C

A

B

C

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr30,000 mi/48,000 km

30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs3 yrs

50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km

60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km

90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs110,000 mi/176,000 km

6 yrs

110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km

120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

9 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs

Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 238 ).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace dust and pollen filter.

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.

Replace air cleaner element (independent oftime).Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B.

Replace brake fluid (independent ofmileage).Do items in A.

Replace air cleaner element (independent oftime).Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.

Replace air cleaner element (independent oftime).Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B.

Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.Replace spark plugs.Replace brake fluid (independent of

mileage).Do items in A.

Replace air cleaner element (independent oftime).

Replace transmission fluid (M/T, A/T).Do items in A, B, C.

Replace brake fluid (independent ofmileage).

Replace engine coolant.Inspect idle speed.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.196

1

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement informationunder special driving conditions.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:

1:

:

236

197

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

Page 203: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

*#

# #

Maintenance200

Service at the indicated distance or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisyEvery 110,000 miles (176,000 km)

Service the following items at the recommended intervals.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Replace every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsCheck oil and coolant at each fuel stop

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

1016

2032

3048

4064

5080

6096

70112

80128

90144

100160

110176

120192

Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 8 years

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

Check engine oil and coolantReplace engine oilRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once per month)Replace engine oil filterInspect front and rear brakesLubricate all hinges, locks, and latchesVisually inspect the following items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots, suspension componentsDriveshaft boots

Check parking brake adjustmentVisually inspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust system, fuel lines and connections

Lights and controls, vehicle underbodyInspect and adjust drive beltsReplace dust and pollen filterReplace transmission fluid

Clean or replace air cleaner element

Replace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceInspect idle speed

Replace engine coolant

Replace brake fluid

24 48 7212 36 60

1:: 197

M/TA/T

232

Clean every 15,000 miles (24,000 km), and replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)(Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)

1

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

Page 204: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

--

□□

□□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□□

CONTINUEDMaintenance 201

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A, B, C, D

A

B

C

D

Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

5,000 mi/8,000 km/6 mos10,000 mi/16,000 km/1 yr15,000 mi/24,000 km

15,000 mi/24,000 km/1-½ yrs20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr25,000 mi/40,000 km/2 yrs30,000 mi/48,000 km

30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs35,000 mi/56,000 km/2-½ yrs40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs3 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km

45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs50,000 mi/80,000 km/3 yrs55,000 mi/88,000 km/3-½ yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km

60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs

65,000 mi/104,000 km/4 yrs70,000 mi/112,000 km/4 yrs75,000 mi/120,000 km

75,000 mi/120,000 km/4-½ yrs80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs85,000 mi/136,000 km/5 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km

90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.

Clean air cleaner element (independent oftime).Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace air cleaner element (independent oftime).Do items in A, B, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Clean air cleaner element (independent of

time).Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace air cleaner element (independent oftime).

Replace transmission fluid (M/T, A/T).Do items in A, B, C, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.

Clean air cleaner element (independent oftime).Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace air cleaner element (independent oftime).

Replace transmission fluid (A/T).Do items in A, B, D.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.

Replace engine oil.Inspect front and rear brakes.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 238 ).Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches.Replace engine oil filter.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace dust and pollen filter.

196

1

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

Page 205: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

□□

□□

□□□#

Maintenance202

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement informationunder special driving conditions.

NOTE:

1:

:197

23295,000 mi/152,000 km/5-½ yrs100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs6 yrs105,000 mi/168,000 km

105,000 mi/168,000 km/6 yrs110,000 mi/176,000 km

110,000 mi/176,000 km/6 yrs115,000 mi/184,000 km/6-½ yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km

120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

9 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Clean air cleaner element (independent of

time).Do items in A.

Inspect valve clearance, cold engine.Replace spark plugs.

Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace air cleaner element (independent oftime).

Replace transmission fluid (M/T, A/T).Do items in A, B, C, D.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace engine coolant.Inspect idle speed.

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

(lis

ted

by

dis

tance

/tim

e)

Page 206: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUEDMaintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

203

5,000 mi

10,000 mi

15,000 mi

20,000 mi

25,000 mi

30,000 mi

35,000 mi

40,000 mi

45,000 mi

50,000 mi

55,000 mi

60,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp8,000 km

16,000 km

24,000 km

32,000 km(or 1 year)

40,000 km

48,000 km

56,000 km

64,000 km(or 2 years)

72,000 km

80,000 km

88,000 km

96,000 km(or 3 years)

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

200198

Page 207: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

204

65,000 mi

70,000 mi

75,000 mi

80,000 mi

85,000 mi

90,000 mi

95,000 mi

100,000 mi

105,000 mi

110,000 mi

115,000 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp104,000 km

112,000 km

120,000 km

128,000 km(or 4 years)

136,000 km

144,000 km

152,000 km

160,000 km(or 5 years)

168,000 km

176,000 km

184,000 km

192,000 km(or 6 years)

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Page 208: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Windshield washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate lights monthly. Seepage .

159

216

217

219

235

244

160

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance 205

Page 209: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Fluid Locations

Maintenance206

ENGINE OILFILL CAP(Black cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

(Manual Transmission only)CLUTCH FLUID(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

Page 210: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and install theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’Oil is major contributor to your

engine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your car for aslong as you own it.

Pour the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Adding Oil Recommended Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance 207

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Page 211: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 ispreferred for improved fuel economyand year-round protection in yourAcura. You may use a 10W-30 oil ifthe temperature in your area nevergoes below 20°F ( 7°C).

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Acura, toimprove cold weather starting, andto help your engine use less fuel.

The oil’s viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.Select the oil for your car accordingto this chart.

RSX and Premium models Type-S

Engine Oil

Maintenance208

Ambient Temperature Ambient Temperature

Page 212: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the car. The car shouldbe raised on a service station-typehydraulic lift for this service. Unlessyou have the knowledge and properequipment, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

Your Acura does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

CONTINUED

Synthetic Oil Additives Changing the Oil and Filter

Engine Oil

Maintenance 209

Page 213: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from your Acuradealer) is required to remove thefilter.

Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

4.

3.2.

1.

Engine Oil

Maintenance210

WASHER OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL FILTER

Page 214: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

7.

8.

9.

5.

6.

(RSX and Premium models)

(Type-S)

(RSX and Premium models)

(Type-S)

Engine Oil

Maintenance 211

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

Page 215: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.The coolant you add should alwaysbe a mixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water. Itdoes not require any additionalmixing. If it is not available, you mayuse another major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result incorrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Adding Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance212

MAX

MIN

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 216: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Make sure the engine andradiator are cool.

Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your car’s coolingsystem. They may not be compatiblewith the coolant or engine compo-nents.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill. Cleanup any spills immediately. Spilledcoolant could damage componentsin the engine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

6.

5.

4.

2.

3.

1.

Cooling System

Maintenance 213

RADIATOR CAP

RESERVE TANK

Page 217: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Open the hood. Make sure theengine and radiator are cool to thetouch.

Remove the radiator cap.

The cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the car. Unlessyou have the tools and knowledge,you should have this maintenancedone by a skilled mechanic. Remove the cover under the

radiator.Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe temperature control dial tomaximum heat. Turn the ignitionoff.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Cooling System

Maintenance

Replacing Engine Coolant

214

COVER

Page 218: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator up to the base of thefiller neck. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.

Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Drain thecoolant into an appropriatecontainer.

When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

Remove the clip, then remove thereserve tank drain cap. Drain thecoolant into an appropriatecontainer.

Install the reserve tank drain capand clip.

5. 6.

7.

8.

Cooling System

Maintenance 215

DRAIN PLUG

CLIP

DRAINCAP

Fill up to here

FILLER NECK

Page 219: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal use. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel. This reservoir supplies thewindshield and rear window washers.

The cooling system capacity is:

Start the engine and let it run forabout 30 seconds. Then turn offthe engine.

Fill the radiator with coolant up tothe base of the filler neck.

Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator cooling fan comes onat least twice. Then stop theengine.

Remove the radiator cap. Fill theradiator with coolant up to thebase of the filler neck.

Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the radiator fancomes on. Turn off the engine.Check the coolant level in theradiator and add coolant if needed.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

If necessary, fill the reserve tankto the MAX mark. Install thereserve tank cap.

9.

11.

10.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

With automatic transmission:

Manual Transmission:

Maintenance

Cooling System, Windshield Washers

Windshield Washers

216

1.35 US gal (5.1 )

1.32 US gal (5.0 )

Page 220: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the driver’s sideheadlight. Check the reservoir’s fluidlevel by removing the cap andlooking at the level gauge attachedto the cap.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Windshield Washers, Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission

217

WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR

LEVEL GAUGE

DIPSTICK

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,while a vinegar/water solution candamage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer f luid.

Page 221: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the filler holeto bring it to the upper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If itis not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Have thetransmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it isconvenient.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

5. 6.

4.

3.

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance218

UPPERMARK

LOWERMARK

Page 222: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Check the fluid level in the reser-voirs monthly. There are up to tworeservoirs, depending on the model.They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time recommenda-tion in the maintenance schedule.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the car sitting onlevel ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda Manual Transmis-sion Fluid (MTF) until it starts torun out of the hole. Reinstall thefiller bolt and tighten it securely.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

CONTINUED

Brake and Clutch FluidManual Transmission

Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance 219

Correct level

FILLER BOLT

Page 223: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement. However, the use ofany non-Honda brake fluid can causecorrosion and decrease the life of thesystem. Have the brake systemflushed and refilled with HondaHeavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 assoon as possible.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your car’s brakingsystem and can cause extensivedamage.

Brake System Clutch System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance220

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

Page 224: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. If it is not available, you mayuse another power steering fluid asan emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

Check the level when the engine iscold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

Power Steering

Maintenance 221

UPPER LEVEL LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

Do not spill the power steering f luidover the body, auto-tensioner, drivebelt and pulleys.If spilled accidentally, wipe of f anyf luid completely.

Page 225: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To replace it: Loosen the five bolts.

Clean the air cleaner element byblowing compressed air through it inthe opposite direction to normal airflow. If you do not have access tocompressed air (such as a servicestation), ask your Acura dealer to dothis service.

The air cleaner element should becleaned or replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Unsnap the clamp, then removethe intake air duct from the frontof the air cleaner housing.

Use a pair of pliers to slide backthe clamp on the breather tubeattached to the side of the housing.

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver’sside of the engine compartment.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

1.

2.

3.

Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance

Cleaning (Severe Conditions)

Replacement

222

AIR CLEANERHOUSING

BREATHER TUBE

INTAKE AIR DUCT

BOLTS

Page 226: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Lift up the cover slightly, thenmove it sideways to separate itfrom the breather tube.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and tighten the five bolts.

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

Push the air cleaner housing coverinto the breather tube.

Install the breather tube clamp.

Install the intake air duct andclamp.

4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance 223

COVER

BREATHER TUBE AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

Page 227: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts (as shown),including the pivot. Follow the timeand distance recommendations inthe Maintenance Schedule. If youare not sure how to clean and greasethe latch, contact your Acura dealer.

The spark plugs in your car shouldbe replaced according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule.

Clean off any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

Remove the four nuts, thenremove the coil cover.

1.

2.

ReplacementSpark PlugsHood Latch

Maintenance

Hood Latch, Spark Plugs

224

LATCHASSEMBLY

PIVOTS

COILCOVER

NUTS

Page 228: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Use a wrench to remove the boltholding the ignition coil. Pull theignition coil up slightly.

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

Put the new spark plug into thesocket, then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Remove the ignition coil.

6.

5.

4.

3.

7.

8.

(RSX and Premium models)

(Type-S)

CONTINUED

Spark Plugs

Maintenance 225

CONNECTOR

IGNITIONCOIL

LOCK TAB

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

18 lbf·ft (25 N·m , 2.5 kgf·m)

Page 229: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

+-

+-

Check the condition of your car’sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

Plug Gap:

Plug Gap:

Insert the ignition coil into thehole.

Connect the wire connector to theignition coil.

Push the ignition coil down all theway. Install the bolt.

Repeat this procedure for theother three spark plugs.

Reinstall the coil cover, andtighten the four nuts.

9.

(RSX and Premium models)

10.

11.

12.

DENSO:NGK:

NGK:DENSO:

(Type-S)

BatterySpecifications:

Maintenance

Spark Plugs, Battery

226

0.04 in (1.1 mm)

0.04 in (1.1 mm)

IZFR6K11SKJ20DR-M11

IFR7G-11KSSK22PR-M11S

00.1mm

00.1mm

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

Page 230: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative ( ) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.Check the battery condition by

looking at the test indicator windowon the battery. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

CONTINUED

Battery

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

227

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Page 231: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the car’selectrical system.

Your driver’s power window (seepage ) and your audio systemwill also disable itself when the bat-tery is disconnected or goes dead.The next time you turn on the radioyou will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons to en-ter the five-digit code (see page ).

92

147

Battery

Maintenance228

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourcar’s electronic controls. Detach thebattery cables bef ore connecting thebattery to a charger.

Page 232: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

To replace a blade (front or rear):

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield or rear window.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 229

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Page 233: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield or rear window.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance230

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

Page 234: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page

.)

Your car’s air conditioning is a sealedsystem. Any major maintenance,such as recharging, should be doneby a qualified mechanic. You can doa couple of things to make sure theair conditioning works efficiently. 290

CONTINUED

Air Conditioning System

Maintenance 231

AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER

The condenser and radiator f ins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor sof t-bristle brush to clean them.

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicef acility uses a ref rigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures theref rigerant f or reuse. Releasingref rigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

Page 235: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To replace it:

Open the glove box. Remove thehooks on the side panels by pullingout on the tabs. Pivot the glovebox out of the way.

The dust and pollen filter is locatedbehind the glove box.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) undernormal conditions. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if air flow from theheating and cooling system becomesless than usual.

The dust and pollen filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the heatingand cooling system.

Remove the dust and pollen filtercover by pushing up on the locktab, then pivoting up the cover.

1.

2.

U.S. : All modelsCanada : Premium and Type-S

Optional on RSX

Replacement

Dust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance232

HOOKS

TAB

COVER

Page 236: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Remove the first filter by pulling itstraight out of the air conditioningunit. Remove the second filter bysliding it to the left, then pulling itout.

Install the new filters. Reinstall thecover.

Pivot the glove box up intoposition. Reinstall the hooks intothe side panel of the glove box.Close the glove box.

If you are not sure how to replacethe dust and pollen filters, have themreplaced by your Acura dealer.

3.

4.

5.

Dust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance 233

DUST AND POLLEN FILTERS

Page 237: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

An auto-tensioner adjusts the tensionof the drive belt. The indicator onthe auto-tensioner should be in theproper range. It should be checkedaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in themaintenance schedule.

If the indicator is not within theproper range, have the drive beltreplaced by your Acura dealer assoon as possible.

Drive Belts

Maintenance

Drive Belt

234

INDICATOR

Proper range

Page 238: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

To safely operate your car, your tiresmust be the proper type and size, ingood condition with adequate tread,and correctly inflated. The followingpages give more detailed informationon how and when to check airpressure, how to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make your carride more harshly, are more prone todamage from road hazards, and wearunevenly.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the carhas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive the carbefore checking the tire pressure,the tires can still be considered‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot [the car has been drivenseveral miles (kilometers)], you willsee readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa,0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than thecold reading. This is normal. Do notlet air out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges. CONTINUED

Inflation

Tires

Maintenance 235

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Page 239: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds. Tire pressures for highspeed driving are the same as fornormal driving.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure forNormal DrivingFront:

Rear:

InspectionRecommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

Tires

Maintenance236

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.20 kgf/cm )

P195/65R15 89HP205/55R16 89V

33 psi (230 kPa ,2.3 kgf/cm )

31 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

Page 240: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

Your car’s tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your car’soriginal tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

(Only on cars equipped with aluminumwheels)

Maintenance

Tires

Maintenance 237

INDICATORLOCATIONMARKS

TREAD WEARINDICATORS

Improper wheel weights can damageyour car’s aluminum wheels. Use onlygenuine Acura wheel weights f orbalancing.

Page 241: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare ‘‘directional.’’ This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,they should be rotated only front-to-back.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every10,000 miles (16,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

Tire Rotation

Tires

Maintenance238

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Page 242: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your car. Replacementwheels are available at your Acuradealer.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the car. Tire size andconstruction can affect wheel speedand may cause the system to workinconsistently.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your car’s handling.

The tires that came with your carwere selected to match the perform-ance capabilities of the car whileproviding the best combination ofhandling, ride comfort, and long life.You should replace them with radialtires of the same size, load range,speed rating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall). Mixing radial andbias-ply tires on your car can reduceits braking ability, traction, andsteering accuracy.

CONTINUED

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance 239

Installing improper tires on yourcar can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

Page 243: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

+Wheels:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading. Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or

‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Tires:

292

(Canada : RSX)

(U.S. : All modelsCanada : Premium and Type-Smodels)

(Canada : RSX)

(U.S. : All modelsCanada : Premium and Type-Smodels)

Winter DrivingWheels and Tires

Tires

Maintenance240

15 x 6 JJ

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

P205/55R16 89V

P195/65R15 89H

Page 244: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Mount snow chains on your carwhen warranted by driving condi-tions or required by local laws. Makesure the chains are the correct sizefor your tires. Install them only onthe front tires.

Use only SAE class ‘‘S’’ chains. Onlycertain brands of chains will fit yourAcura without coming in contactwith the body or causing mechanicaldamage. Before buying any types ofchains, you should consult with yourAcura dealer about the designs andbrands that will work on your Acura.Also, make sure you purchase thecorrect size for your tires.

If you mount snow tires on yourAcura, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour car’s handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your car’soriginal equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommen-dations.

When installing chains, follow themanufacturer’s instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed. Ifyou hear them contacting the bodyor chassis, stop and investigate.Make sure the chains are installedtightly, and that they are notcontacting the brake lines orsuspension. Remove the chains assoon as you start driving on clearedroads.

Snow Tires Tire Chains

Tires

Maintenance 241

Chains of the wrong size or that areimproperly installed can damage yourcar’s brake lines, suspension, body, andwheels. Stop driving if you hear thechains hitting any part of the car.

Page 245: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Check the operation of your car’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourcar’s visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

Lights

Maintenance242

HEADLIGHT HIGHBEAM

TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

HEADLIGHT LOW BEAM

PARKING LIGHT

Page 246: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Check the following:Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount brake lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightSide marker lightsDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

290

Lights

Maintenance 243

TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

BACK-UP LIGHT

HIGH-MOUNTBRAKE LIGHT

SIDE MARKER LIGHT LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT

Page 247: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Open the hood.

Your car has two bulbs on each side,four in total. Make sure you arereplacing the bulb that is burned out.Your car uses halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

(Passenger’s side)

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your car was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustment of the headlights shouldbe performed by an Acura technicianor other qualified mechanic.

Remove the power steeringreservoir from the bracket.

1.

2.

Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlight Aiming

Lights

Maintenance244

Passenger’s side

POWER STEERING RESERVOIR

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

Page 248: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way and remove the bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place and clip the end intothe slot.

Install the rubber seal over theback of the headlight assembly.Make sure it is right side up; it ismarked ‘‘TOP.’’

Push the electrical connector ontothe tabs of the new bulb. Makesure it locks in place.Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

(Passenger’s side)Install the power steeringreservoir on the bracket.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Maintenance 245

BULB

WEATHERSEAL

HOLDDOWN WIRE CONNECTOR

Page 249: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Install the power steeringreservoir on the bracket.

Open the hood.

(Passenger’s side)Remove the power steeringreservoir from the bracket.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7. (Passenger’s side)

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Front Turn SignalLight Bulb

246

Passenger’s side

POWER STEERING RESERVOIR

BULB

Page 250: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Open the hood. The front parkinglight is next to the headlight bulb.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Open the hatch.

Remove the high-mount brakelight cover by pivoting it towardthe back of the car.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

1.

3.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Replacing a Front Parking LightBulb

247

BULB

BULB

COVER

Page 251: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Reinstall the high-mount brakelight cover.

Insert a flat-tipped screwdriverbetween the left edge of the lensand the housing. The lens willcome down.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Put the lens back into the lightassembly, right side first. Push onthe left edge until it snaps intoplace.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1. 2.

3.

4.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

248

BULB

Page 252: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Install the light assembly cover.Make sure it locks in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Open the hatch. Remove the lightassembly cover by pulling on thetab on the outside edge.

Determine which of the five bulbsis burned out: brake/taillight, turnsignal light, side marker light,back-up light, or taillight.

2.

3.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Rear Bulbs

249

COVER

Page 253: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

Remove the cargo area lightassembly by carefully prying onthe left edge of the lens with a flat-tip screwdriver and pulling theassembly out.

Open the hatch.1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Ceiling Light Bulb Replacing a Cargo Area LightBulb

250

BULB

BULB

Page 254: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of the bulb holder.

Push the new bulb into the bulbholder.

Reinstall the lens by inserting theoutside edge first, then pushing onthe inside edge.

Remove the lens of the burned outbulb by carefully prying on theedge between the lenses with afingernail file or a small flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Slide the right side of the lightassembly into the hole. Push onthe left side to latch the assemblyinto place.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

3.

4.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing the Spotlight Bulbs

251

BULB

Page 255: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Block the rear wheels.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page ).

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

If you need to park your car for anextended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your car back on the road. Ifpossible, store your car indoors.

If the car is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe car is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand hatch seals. Also, apply a bodywax to the painted surfaces thatmate with the door and hatch seals.

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your car for 12 monthsor longer, have your Acura dealerperform the inspections called for inthe 24 months/30,000 miles (48,000km) maintenance schedule (NormalConditions) as soon as you take itout of storage (see page ). Thereplacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the car has actuallyreached that time or mileage.

Cover the car with a ‘‘breathable’’cover, one made from a porousmaterial such as cotton.Nonporous materials, such asplastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

209

198

Maintenance

Storing Your Car

252

Page 256: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Acura helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives you hintson how to clean your car andpreserve its appearance: the paint,brightwork, wheels and interior. Alsoincluded are several things you cando to help prevent corrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 254.....................................Washing . 254

.......................................Waxing . 255....................Aluminum Wheels . 255

..........................Paint Touch-up . 255..................................Interior Care . 256...................................Carpeting . 256.................................Floor Mats . 256

.........................................Fabric . 257...........................................Vinyl . 257

.......................................Leather . 257...................................Seat Belts . 257....................................Windows . 258

..........................Air Fresheners . 258.................................Dashboard . 258

....................Corrosion Protection . 259.................................Body Repairs . 260

Appearance Care

Appearance Care 253

Page 257: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner’sManual.

Frequent washing helps preserveyour car’s beauty. Dirt and grit canscratch the paint, while tree sap andbird droppings can permanently ruinthe finish.

Wash your car in a shady area, not indirect sunlight. If the car is parked inthe sun, move it into the shade andlet the exterior cool down before youstart.

Rinse the car thoroughly with coolwater to remove loose dirt.

As you dry the car, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).

Wash the car using the water anddetergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe car does not need waxing.

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

255

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

254

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your car.

Page 258: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Acurawhen it is new.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. You

should use a polish on your Acura ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Always wash and dry the whole carbefore waxing it. You should waxyour car, including the metal trim,whenever water sits on the surfacein large patches. It should form intobeads or droplets after waxing.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the car does notneed waxing.

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your car’s color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver’s doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Inspect your car frequently for chipsor scratches in the paint. Repairthem right away to prevent corrosionof the metal underneath. Use thetouch-up paint only on small chipsand scratches. More extensive paintdamage should be repaired by aprofessional.

Clean your Acura’s aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners, or stiffbrushes can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

On some models

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing

Aluminum Wheels

Paint Touch-up

255

Page 259: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

If you remove the floor mat, makesure to re-anchor it when you put itback in your car.

If you replace it, use an Acura floormat that is designed to be used withthe floor mat anchor in your car.

If you use a non-Acura floor mat inthe driver’s footwell, make sure itfits properly and that it can be usedwith the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats ontop of the anchored mat, otherwisethe additional mats may slideforward and interfere with the pedals.

The Acura driver’s floor mat thatcame with your car was designed tobe hooked over the floor mat anchor.This keeps the floor mat from slidingforward and possibly interfering withthe pedals.

Carpeting Floor Mats

Appearance Care

Interior Care

256

Page 260: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the car.

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

On some models

CONTINUED

Seat BeltsFabric

Vinyl

Leather

Interior Care

Appearance Care 257

LOOP

Page 261: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of your car,it is best to use a solid type. Someliquid air fresheners contain chemi-cals that may cause parts of theinterior trim and fabric to crack ordiscolor.

Clean the dashboard with a mildsolution of soap and water, or acommercially available vinyl cleaner,and a soft-bristle brush. A cloth ortowel will not clean the dust and dirtout of the recesses of the latticepattern.

Air FreshenersWindows

Dashboard

Interior Care

Appearance Care258

The rear window def ogger andantenna wires are bonded to the insideof the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-down can dislodge and break thesewires. When cleaning the rear window,use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

Page 262: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your car:

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thecar stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the car.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Acura. You canhelp keep your car from corrodingby performing some simple periodicmaintenance:

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your car. This isespecially important in areas thatuse road salt in winter. It is also agood idea in humid climates andareas subject to salt air. Carsequipped with ABS have a sensorand wiring at each wheel. Becareful not to damage them.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourcar inspected and repairedperiodically.

1.

2.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care 259

Page 263: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Make sure the repair facility usesAcura replacement body parts. Somecompanies make sheet metal piecesthat seem to duplicate the originalAcura body parts, but are actuallyinferior in fit, finish, and corrosionresistance. Once installed, they donot give the same high-qualityappearance.

Body repairs can affect your car’sresistance to corrosion. If your carneeds repairs after a collision, payclose attention to the parts used inthe repair and the quality of thework.

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant Acura parts used in the repair.Although most insurers recognizethe quality of original parts, somemay try to specify that the repairs bedone with other available parts. Youshould investigate this before anyrepairs have begun.

Take your car to your authorizedAcura dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care260

Page 264: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your car towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 262....................Changing a Flat Tire . 263

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 268Nothing Happens or theStarter Motor Operates

............................Very Slowly . 268The Starter Operates

................................Normally . 269

................................Jump Starting . 270............If Your Engine Overheats . 272

.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 274..........Charging System Indicator . 275

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 276...............Brake System Indicator . 278

..................Closing the Moonroof . 279..............................................Fuses . 280

..........Checking and Replacing . 281......................Emergency Towing . 285

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 261

Page 265: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

Your car has a compact spare tirethat takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put it backon your car as soon as you can.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour car. Do not use your sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not drive with the compactspare tire mounted on the frontwheels for a long period; it willdamage the Limited SlipDifferential.

Type-S only

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected262

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.20 kgf/cm )

Page 266: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the car on firm, level andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark (automatic) or Reverse(manual). Apply the parking brake.

Open the hatch. Pull up the floormat and remove the spare tirecover.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the car whileyou change the tire.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

Unscrew the wing bolt.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected 263

TOOL KIT

JACKThe car can easily roll off thejack, seriously injuring anyoneunderneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the car when itis supported only by the jack.

Page 267: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel wrench.

Take the spare tire out of its well.

Lift the bass speaker out of thespare tire and set it aside. Do notpull on the wiring harness going tothe speaker.

5.

6.

7. 8.Type-S only:

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Changing a Flat Tire

264

BASS SPEAKER(Type-S only)

JACK

WHEEL WRENCH

Page 268: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Temporarilyplace the flat tire on the groundwith the outside surface of thewheel facing up. You could scratchthe wheel if you put it face down.

Find the jacking point nearest thewheel you are removing. Place thejack under the jacking point. Turnthe end bracket clockwise untilthe top of the jack contacts thejacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

9. 10.

11.

12.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected 265

JACKING POINT

EXTENSION

WHEEL WRENCH

Page 269: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Lower the car to the ground andremove the jack.

13. 14. 15.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Changing a Flat Tire

266

(Except Type-S)

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Page 270: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Remove the wheel cover or centercap.Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket clockwise toraise the jack and lock it in place.

Screw the adapter into the hole inthe spare tire well. Remove the spacer cone from the

wing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire with the wingbolt.

Set the bass speaker inside thewheel.

18.

19.

16.

17.

20.

21.Type-S only:All except Type-S:

Type-S only:

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Changing a Flat Tire

267

ADAPTER (Type-S only) WINGBOLT SPACER

CONE

Page 271: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Store the tool kit.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the cargo area. Make sure itwill not get scratched or damaged.

Reinstall the floor mat and sparetire cover, then close the hatch.

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

22.

23.

24.

270

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

If Your Engine Won’t Start

Jump Starting

Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won’t Start

268

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Page 272: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (See

on page .)

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the car froma booster battery (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Your car has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page ).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

280

285285

226

270

75

169

If Your Engine Won’t Start

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Emergency Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

EmergencyTowing

Starting theEngine

269

Page 273: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To jump start your car, follow thesedirections closely:

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page ). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourAcura’s battery. Connect the otherend to the positive ( ) terminalon the booster battery.

If your car’s battery has run down,you may be able to start the engineby using a booster battery. Althoughthis seems like a simple procedure,you should take several precautions.

You cannot start an Acura with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

1.

2.

3.

191

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Jump Starting

270

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

Page 274: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

-Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Once your car is running, discon-nect the negative cable from yourcar, then from the booster battery.Disconnect the positive cable fromyour car, then the booster battery.

Start your car. If the starter motorstill operates slowly, check thejumper cable connections to makesure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until all aredisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

5.

4.

6.

7.

Jump Starting

Taking Care of the Unexpected 271

BOOSTER BATTERY

Page 275: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off the heating and coolingsystem and all other accessories.Turn on the hazard warningindicators.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

The pointer of your car’s tempera-ture gauge should stay in the mid-range under most conditions. It maygo higher if you are driving up a longsteep hill on a very hot day. If itclimbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Your car can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

If Your Engine Overheats

Taking Care of the Unexpected272

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

Page 276: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Start the engine and set thetemperature control lever tomaximum. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below theMIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See

on page .)

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

11.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

12.

285

160

285Emergency

Towing

EmergencyTowing

If Your Engine Overheats

Taking Care of the Unexpected 273

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 277: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See

on page .)Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the car sit for a minute. Openthe hood and check the oil level(see page ). Although oil leveland oil pressure are not directlyconnected, an engine that is verylow on oil can lose pressure duringcornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

1.

2.

3.

4.

285

159

207

EmergencyTowing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected274

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe car stopped.

Page 278: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C, reardefogger, cruise control, etc. Try notto use other electrically-operatedcontrols such as the power windows.Keep the engine running and takeextra care not to stall it. Starting theengine will discharge the batteryrapidly.

Charging System Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected 275

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

Page 279: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

You should also have the dealerinspect your car if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, it indicates one ofthe engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour car’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeyour car to put out excessiveemissions. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourcar, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedays of normal driving.

If the indicator remains on past that,or the fuel cap was not loose ormissing, have the car checked by thedealer as soon as possible. Drivemoderately until the dealer hasinspected the problem. Avoid full-throttle acceleration and driving athigh speed.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking Care of the Unexpected276

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your car’s emissions controlsand engine. Those repairs may not becovered by your car’s warranties.

Page 280: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Your car has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your car’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your car for astate emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. To check ifthey are set, turn the ignition ON (II),but do not start the engine. TheMalfunction Indicator Lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks 5 times, the readinesscodes are not set. See StateEmissions Testing on pages and

.300299

Readiness Codes

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking Care of the Unexpected 277

Page 281: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the car. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

If you must drive the car a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

The Brake System Indicatornormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to check the parking brake.It comes on and stays lit if you do notfully release the parking brake.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system’s dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before the carbegins to slow down, and you willhave to press harder on the pedal.The distance needed to stop will bemuch longer.

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the car’sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feels

normal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page ). If thefluid level is low, take the car to yourdealer and have the brake systeminspected for leaks or worn brakepads.

219

285Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected278

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

U.S. indicator shown

Page 282: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the cargo area.

5.

6.

4.

1.

2.

3.

281

Closing the Moonroof

Taking Care of the Unexpected 279

ROUND PLUG SOCKET

Page 283: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The under-hood fuse box is locatedin the engine compartment next tothe battery. To open it, push the tabas shown.

All the electrical circuits in your carhave fuses to protect them from ashort circuit or overload. Thesefuses are located in two or three fuseboxes.

The interior fuse box is underneaththe dashboard on the driver’s side.Remove the fuse box by turning theknob and pulling the lid straight outof its hinges.

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected280

INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD TAB

Page 284: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If something electrical in your carstops working, the first thing youshould check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component’soperation.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the interior fusebox.

3.1.

2.

4.

283 284

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected 281

FUSE

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

Page 285: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘Code’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If you cannot drive the car withoutfixing the problem, and you do nothave a spare fuse, take a fuse of thesame rating or a lower rating fromone of the other circuits. Make sureyou can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the cigarettelighter or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your car.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your car checkedby a qualified mechanic.

5.

6.

147

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Fuses

282

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment f use with the proper rating f or thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

Page 286: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

**

No. Circuits Protected

No. Circuits Protected

123456789101112

Ignition CoilLaf HeaterDaytime Running LightsACG (IG)Not UsedPower Window RelayMoon roofRadioRear WiperGauge panelABSDaytime Running Lights

13141516171819202122232425

SRSPower MirrorBass SpeakerHeated SeatsFuel PumpAccessory Power SocketTurn SignalFront WiperNot UsedFront Passenger’s Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedNot Used

Canadian models onlyType-S only

1 :2 :

1

1

2

1

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected 283

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Page 287: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

No. Circuits Protected

123456789

1011121314151617181920

21 25

Condenser fanSmall LightInterior LightCooling FanHazardFI ECUHorn, StopABS (F/S)Back UpABS MotorRear DemisterHeater MortorPower WindowOptionLeft HeadlightDoor LockRight HeadlightNot UsedMain Fuse BatteryMain Fuse IgnitionSpare Fuse

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Fuses

284

UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX

Page 288: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

If your Acura cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If, due todamage, your car must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following.

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

If your car needs to be towed, call aprofessional towing service or, if youbelong to one, an organization thatprovides roadside assistance. Nevertow your car behind another vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operatorloads your car on the back of a truck.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the car offthe ground. Your car’s suspensionand body can be seriously damaged.

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

Automatic Transmission

Manual Transmission:

CONTINUED

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Flat-bed Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This isan acceptable way to tow yourAcura.

This is the best way to transportyour Acura.

This method of towing isunacceptable.

Emergency Towing

Taking Care of the Unexpected 285

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourcar must be transported with the f rontwheels of f the ground.

Page 289: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you decide to tow your car with allfour wheels on the ground, makesure you use a properly-designed andattached tow bar. Prepare the car fortowing as described above, and leavethe ignition switch in Accessory (I)so the steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and anyelectrical accessories are turned offso they do not run down the battery.

Emergency Towing

Taking Care of the Unexpected286

Trying to lif t or tow your car by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the car’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

Page 290: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

--

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Acura, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 288................................Specifications . 290

DOT Tire Quality Grading.............................(U.S. Cars) . 292

.................................Treadwear . 292...........Traction AA, A, B, C . 292...........Temperature A, B, C . 293

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 294......Driving in Foreign Countries . 295

.......................Emissions Controls . 296.....................The Clean Air Act . 296

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 296

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 296

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 297

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 297....................PGM-FI System . 297

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 297

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 297

....................Replacement Parts . 297..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 298

..............State Emissions Testing . 299

Technical Information

Technical Information 287

Page 291: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Your car has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourAcura dealer uses to register yourcar for warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour car. The easiest place to findthe VIN is on a plate fastened to thetop of the dashboard. You can see itby looking through the windshieldon the driver’s side. It is also on theCertification label attached to thedriver’s doorjamb, and is stamped onthe engine compartment bulkhead.The VIN is also provided in bar codeon the Certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information288

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Page 292: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block.

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information 289

ENGINE NUMBER MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

Page 293: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

- -

***

**

Technical Information

Specifications

290

Air ConditioningDimensions

Weights

Engine

Capacities

173.0 in (4,395 mm)67.9 in (1,725 mm)55.1 in (1,400 mm)

HFC-134a (R-134a)17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)

SP-10

13.2 US gal (50 )

1.35 US gal (5.1 )

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

101.2 in (2,570 mm)58.3 in (1,482 mm)58.3 in (1,481 mm)

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Water cooled 4-strokeDOHC VTEC in line,

4-cylinder gasoline engine.3.19 x 3.50 in (81.0 x 88.9 mm)

121.9 cu-in (1,998 cm )9.8 : 111.0 : 1

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratio

Spark plugs

1.32 US gal (5.0 )

1.69 US gal (6.4 )1.66 US gal (6.3 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )4.2 US qt (4.0 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )5.6 US qt (5.3 )6.1 US qt (5.8 )

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:0.16 US gal (0.6 )

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

See spark plug maintenance sec-tion page 224 .

Approx.

1 :

2 :3 :4 :

FrontRear

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncluding filter

Without filter

Total

RSX and Premium modelsType-S

1 :2 :

RSX and Premium modelsType-S

1

2

1

4

2

3

2

3

2

3

Page 294: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

****

--------------

* * *

* * *

Specifications

Technical Information 291

FusesCapacities

Battery

Alignment

Tires

Lights

0.0 in (0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°00’

Interior

Under-hood1.8 US qt (1.7 )1.6 US qt (1.5 )

2.9 US qt (2.7 )6.9 US qt (6.5 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )

Manualtransmissionfluid

12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

55 W55 W21 W

21 W21 W/5 W21 W5 W21 W5 W8 W5 W8 W

See page 283 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the dashboard.See page 284 or the fuse boxcover.

12 V 5 W (Amber)

Capacity 12 V 36 AH/5 HR

3.4 W12 V

0°45’1°30’

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

P205/55R16 89VT135/70D15 99MT125/70D16 96M

P195/65R15 89H

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )31 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.20 kgf/cm )

Headlights

Front turn signalFront position lightsRear turn signal lightsBrake/TaillightsHigh-mount brake lightRear side marker lightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightCargo area lightSpotlightsGlove Box light

ChangeTotalChangeTotalU.S. carsCanadian cars

Front/Rear

Spare

FrontRearSpare

HighLow

1 :2 :3 :4 :

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Canadian RSXU.S. RSXCanadian PremiumType-S

Automatic trans-mission fluidWindshieldwasher reservoir

1

2, 3, 4

1, 2, 3

4

Page 295: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

-The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Technical Information

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

DOT Quality Grades

292

Page 296: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

- Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Technical Information

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

Temperature A, B, C

293

Page 297: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

(Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

Technical Information

Oxygenated Fuels

METHANOL

MTBE

ETHANOL

294

Page 298: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

If you are planning to take yourAcura outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Acura will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your car back intocompliance will require the replace-ment of several components, such asthe oxygen sensors and the threeway catalytic converter. These re-placements are not covered underwarranty.

Technical Information

Driving in Foreign Countries

295

Page 299: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

The burning of gasoline in your car’sengine produces several byproducts.Some of these are carbon monoxide(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) andhydrocarbons (HC). Gasolineevaporating from the tank alsoproduces hydrocarbons. Controllingthe production of NOx, CO, and HCis important to the environment.Under certain conditions of sunlightand climate, NOx and HC react toform photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

Your car has a Positive CrankcaseVentilation System. This keepsgasses that build up in the engine’scrankcase from going into theatmosphere. The Positive CrankcaseVentilation valve routes them fromthe crankcase back to the intakemanifold. They are then drawn intothe engine and burned.196

The Clean Air Act

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Technical Information

Emissions Controls

296

Page 300: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newGenuine Acura replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your car.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your car. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control and ThreeWay Catalytic Converter. Thesethree systems work together tocontrol the engine’s combustion andminimize the amount of HC, CO, andNOx that comes out the tailpipe. Theexhaust emissions control systemsare separate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Engine Control Module (ECM)or the Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-ing conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO and NOx produced.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Replacement PartsOnboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Exhaust Emissions Controls

PGM-FI System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Ignition Timing Control System

Technical Information

Emissions Controls

297

Page 301: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your car away from high grass,dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your car’s three way catalyticconverter.

Have your car diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Technical Information

Three Way Catalytic Converter

298

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Page 302: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (approximately 3minutes).

State Emissions Testing

Technical Information

Testing of Readiness Codes

299

Page 303: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Acura dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Technical Information

State Emissions Testing

300

Page 304: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Customer Relations................................Information . 302

....................Warranty Coverages . 303Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 304.....................Authorized Manuals . 306

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 301

Page 305: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraCustomer Relations Office.

U.S. Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel:(787) 250-4327

Canadian Owners:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your carDate of purchaseMileage on your carYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thecar to you

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel:1-888-9-ACURA-9Fax:Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

288

Customer Relations Information

Warranty and Customer Relations302

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client ServicesMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Page 306: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

--

- -

--

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

Your new Acura is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from an Acura dealer.

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns the car.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2003 Acura Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your car forprecise information on warrantycoverages. Your Acura’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2003 WarrantyManual that came with your car.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations 303

Page 307: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Acura AutomobileDivision, American Honda Motor Co.,Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or AcuraAutomobile Division, AmericanHonda Motor Co., Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

Warranty and Customer Relations304

Page 308: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

305

Page 309: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

*2003

ACU

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Acura dealer.The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm

Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. at1-800-782-4356

(credit card orders only)

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized Manuals

306

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Price

Each

$69.00

$47.00

$44.00

$37.00

$10.00

$10.00

FREE

Publication

Form Number

61S6M01

61S6M01EL

61S6M30

31S6M610

31S6M900

31S6MQ00

ACU-R

Form Description

2002 03 Acura RSX

Service Manual

2002 03 Acura RSX

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2002 03 Acura RSX

Body Repair Manual

2002 Acura RSX

Owner’s Manual

2003 Acura RSX

Maintenance Journal

2003 Acura RSX

Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

www. helminc. com

Page 310: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

SHIP

TO

PAYMENT

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

Authorized Manuals

307

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

Page 311: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 162................................Accessories . 162

...Additional Safety Precaution . 163............................Modifications . 163

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 78

...............Accessory Power Socket . 99....................Additives, Engine Oil . 209

.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 48.....................Air Cleaner Element . 222

..............Air Conditioning System . 102..............................Maintenance . 231

.........................................Usage . 102.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 102.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 235.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 294

......................................Antifreeze . 212Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 61, 183...................................Operation . 182

Anti-theft Steering Column..............................................Lock . 78

..........................Appearance Care . 253................................Audio System . 109

.............Automatic Speed Control . 149..............Automatic Transmission . 173

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 290...............Checking Fluid Level . 217

.......................................Shifting . 173.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 173

................Shift Lever Positions . 173....................Shift Lock Release . 179

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 61, 275............................Jump Starting . 269

..............................Maintenance . 226............................Specifications . 291

..............................Before Driving . 153....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 44

.............................Beverage Holder . 97...................................Body Repair . 260

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 182

.............Break-in, New Linings . 155....................Bulb Replacement . 249

...........................................Fluid . 219

.........................................Parking . 95.................System Indicator . 60, 278........................Wear Indicators . 181

.............................Braking System . 181........................Break-in, New Car . 155

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 70........................Brights, Headlights . 69

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 249

..............................Brake Lights . 249......................Cargo Area Light . 250

..............................Ceiling Light . 250................Front Parking Lights . 247

.........Front Turn Signal Lights . 246.................................Headlights . 244

.........High-mount Brake Light . 247...................License Plate Light . 248

.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 249............................Specifications . 291

...................................Spotlights . 251..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 244

Index

A

B

I

Page 312: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 2, 58

................Daytime Running Lights . 69............Defects, Reporting Safety . 304

........................Defog and Defrost . 105................Defogger, Rear Window . 72

....................................Dimensions . 290...............Dimming the Headlights . 69

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 217

..................................Engine Oil . 159..........................Directional Signals . 70

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 181.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 211

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 79

......................Power Door Locks . 80

...................Capacities Chart . 290, 291.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 54

...........................Cargo Area Cover . 89.............................Carrying Cargo . 164

Cassette Player............................................Care . 137

...................................Operation . 133..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

...................................CD Changer . 139............................................Care . 145

...................................Operation . 141........................Certification Label . 288

............................................Chains . 241Changing Oil

........................................How to . 209......................................When to . 196

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 263............Changing Engine Coolant . 214

...Charging System Indicator . 61, 275............Checklist, Before Driving . 168

.....................................Child Safety . 21.......................................Child Seats . 26

.........................................LATCH . 42..........Tether Anchorage Points . 41

....................Cleaner Element, Air . 222Cleaning

....................Aluminum Wheels . 255...................................Carpeting . 256

......................................Exterior . 254.........................................Fabric . 258

......................Instrument Panel . 258.......................................Interior . 256.......................................Leather . 257

...................................Seat Belts . 257...........................................Vinyl . 257

....................................Windows . 258.........................Clock, Setting the . 114

...................................Clutch Fluid . 219.....................Code, Audio System . 147

........................CO in the Exhaust . 296............Cold Weather, Starting in . 169

..............................Compact Spare . 262...................Console Compartment . 98...............Consumer Information . 302

.............Controls, Instruments and . 57Coolant

........................................Adding . 212....................................Checking . 160

.........................Proper Solution . 212...................................Replacing . 214

...................Temperature Gauge . 67....................Corrosion Protection . 259

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 296

............Cruise Control Operation . 149..........Customer Relations Office . 302

Index

C

D

II

Page 313: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

..............................Economy, Fuel . 161............Emergencies on the Road . 261.............Battery, Jump Starting . 270...........Brake System Indicator . 278

................Changing a Flat Tire . 263.....Charging System Indicator . 275

..................Checking the Fuses . 281.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 274...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 276...Manually Closing Moonroof . 279

..................Overheated Engine . 272...........................Emergency Brake . 95

......................Emergency Flashers . 73......................Emergency Towing . 285

.......................Emissions Controls . 296.............Emissions Testing, State . 299

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 67

.................................Drive Belts . 234Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 61, 276........Oil Pressure Indicator . 61, 274..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 207

...............................Overheating . 272............................Specifications . 290

.......................................Starting . 169......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 294

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 296...............................Exhaust Fumes . 54

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 25

..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 254

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 257...................................Fan, Interior . 102

Features, Comfort and..............................Convenience . 101

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 156

Filters................................Air Cleaner . 222

...............................................Oil . 209Manual Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 219................................Shifting the . 170

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 73...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 263

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 217

..........................................Brake . 219.........................................Clutch . 220

..............Manual Transmission . 219..........................Power Steering . 221

..................Windshield Washer . 216FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 126...........................Folding Rear Seat . 87

.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 295..........................Four-way Flashers . 73

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 292Downshifting, 5-speed and 6-speed

..............Manual Transmission . 170.....................................Drive Belts . 234

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5...........................................Driving . 167

....................................Economy . 161.........................In Bad Weather . 184

................In Foreign Countries . 295

Index

E

F

III

Page 314: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

.................................................Fuel . 155......................Fill Door and Cap . 156

...........................................Gauge . 67................Octane Requirement . 155

...............................Oxygenated . 294........................Reserve Indicator . 62

........................Tank, Filling the . 156.....................Fuses, Checking the . 280

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 288Ignition

..............................................Keys . 75...........................................Switch . 77

............Timing Control System . 297........................Immobilizer System . 76

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6Indicators, Instrument

.............................................Panel . 59...............................Infant Restraint . 21

......................................Infant Seats . 30..........Tether Anchorage Points . 41

.........................................LATCH . 42...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 235

...................................Inside Mirror . 94.............................Inspection, Tire . 236

........................Instrument Panel . 2, 58........Instrument Panel Brightness . 70

...........................Interior Cleaning . 256.................................Interior Lights . 99

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 244................................................Hatch . 80

.................................Opening the . 80...................Open Monitor Light . 62

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 73Headlights

........................................Aiming . 244............Daytime Running Lights . 69

..................High Beam Indicator . 62.........................Reminder Chime . 69

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 244...................................Turning on . 69

..............................Head Restraints . 11.....................Heating and Cooling . 102

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 169.................High-Low Beam Switch . 69..............High-mount Brake Light . 247

....................................Hood Latch . 224.......................Hood, Opening the . 157

..................................................Horn . 68...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 220

.................................Hydroplaning . 185

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 161..........................................Gasohol . 294.........................................Gasoline . 155

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 62...........................................Gauge . 66

................Octane Requirement . 155........................Tank, Filling the . 156

................Gas Station Procedures . 156Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 67...............................................Fuel . 67

...............................Speedometer . 66.................................Tachometer . 66

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 173

5-speed and 6-speed Manual.........................Transmission . 170

..............................Glass Cleaning . 258........................................Glove Box . 84

Index

G

HI

IV

Page 315: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

........................................Introduction . i

........................Jacking up the Car . 265.......................................Jack, Tire . 264

................................Jump Starting . 270

..................................................Keys . 75

.......................Label, Certification . 288.................Lane Change, Signaling . 70

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 44.........................Leather, Cleaning . 257

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 244

.......................................Indicator . 59.........................................Parking . 69

..................................Turn Signal . 70.....................................Load Limit . 165

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 78

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 78

............................Fuel Fill Door . 156....................................Glove Box . 84

............................................Hatch . 80..............Power Door and Hatch . 80

........................Low Coolant Level . 160...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 170

.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 60...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 61, 274

Lubricant Specifications..................................Chart . 290, 291.........................................Luggage . 164

..................................Maintenance . 193...Owner Maintenance Checks . 205

........................................Record . 203......................Required Indicator . 64

.............................Schedule . 198-202.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 61, 276

...................Manual Transmission . 170........Manual Transmission Fluid . 219

...............................Meters, Gauges . 66...................Methanol in Gasoline . 294

..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 94.........................................Moonroof . 93

......................Closing Manually . 279.....................................Operation . 93

...................Neutral Gear Position . 174..................New Vehicle Break-in . 155

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 171...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 288

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 155.........................................Odometer . 66

...............................Odometer, Trip . 66

Index

J

K

L

M

N

O

V

Page 316: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Oil........................Change, How to . 209......................Change, When to . 198......................Checking Engine . 159..............Pressure Indicator . 61, 274

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 208

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 78Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 297..Operation in Foreign Countries . 287

..............................Outside Mirrors . 94....................Overheating, Engine . 272

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 294.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 205

..............................Paint Touch-up . 255..............Panel Brightness Control . 70

........................Park Gear Position . 174...........................................Parking . 180

.................................Parking Brake . 95........................Parking Lights . 69, 247

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 180.............................PGM-FI System . 297

..................Polishing and Waxing . 255............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19............................Protecting Adults . 13

...Additional Safety Precautions . 19.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19

........................Protecting Children . 21.......................Protecting Infants . 30

.......Protecting Larger Children . 37.........Protecting Small Children . 34

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 41

.............................Using LATCH . 42

...................Radiator Overheating . 272.............Radio/CD Sound System . 125

...........................Readiness Codes . 299..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 249

............................Rear Seat Access . 86..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 87

............................Rear View Mirror . 94.................Rear Window Defogger . 73

....................Rear Window Washer . 72.......................Rear Window Wiper . 72

...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 85.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 171

.............................Reminder Lights . 59Replacement Information

.................Air Cleaner Element . 222.......................................Coolant . 214

................Engine Oil and Filter . 209..........................................Fuses . 280

................................Light Bulbs . 244....................................Schedule . 198

................................Spark Plugs . 224...........................................Tires . 235

.............................Wiper Blades . 229Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 46...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 212

...............................Restraint, Child . 21..................Reverse Gear Position . 174

................................Rotation, Tire . 238

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 48.................................Safety Features . 7

.........................................Airbags . 10..................................Door Locks . 11

Index

P

R

S

VI

Page 317: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

CONTINUED

..........................Head Restraints . 11.......................................Seat Belts . 8

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11.............Safety Labels, Location of . 55

...............................Safety Messages . ii.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 44

...............Additional Information . 44.....................................Cleaning . 257

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16, 44................................Maintenance . 46

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 44, 60

...................System Components . 44...............Use During Pregnancy . 19

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16....................................Seat Heaters . 88

..................Seats, Adjusting the . 13, 85............................Security System . 148

...............................Serial Number . 288...........................Service Intervals . 198...........................Service Manual . 306

.........Service Station Procedures . 156..........................Setting the Clock . 130

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 173........................Shift Lock Release . 179

Shifting.The Automatic Transmission . 173

The 5-speed and 6-speed Manual.........................Transmission . 170

...............................Signaling Turns . 70.....................................Snow Tires . 241

...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 254................................Sound System . 109

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 262

............................Specifications . 289................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 224

....................Specifications Charts . 290..................................Speed Control . 74...................................Speedometer . 66

.......................................Spotlights . 100..........SRS, Additional Information . 48

...Additional Safety Precautions . 53...........How Your Airbags Work . 48

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 50How the SRS Indicator Light

.......................................Works . 52........................SRS Components . 48

..................................SRS Service . 51.............................SRS Indicator . 51, 60

..............State Emissions Testing . 299

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 78.......................Starting the Engine . 169

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 169

................With a Dead Battery . 270........Steam Coming from Engine . 272

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 74

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 78...................Stereo Sound System . 125

...........................Storing Your Car . 252Supplemental Restraint

................................System . 10, 48

......................................Servicing . 51.........................SRS Indicator . 51, 60

..................................Synthetic Oil . 209

.....................................Tachometer . 66......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 249

Taking Care of the...............................Unexpected . 261

....................................Tape Player . 133

Index

T

VII

Page 318: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

................Technical Descriptions . 287.....Emissions Control Systems . 296

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 294Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 298.......................Temperature Gauge . 67

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 41..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 298

..........................Time, Setting the . 130....................................Tire Chains . 241

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 263...............................................Tires . 235

..............................Air Pressure . 235.........................Checking Wear . 236..........................Compact Spare . 262

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 292......................................Inflation . 235

..................................Inspection . 236..............................Maintenance . 237

...................................Replacing . 239......................................Rotating . 238

...........................................Snow . 241............................Specifications . 290

................................Tire Chains . 241..........................Winter Driving . 240

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 263

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 186

................................Emergency . 285Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 217

Checking Fluid Level,...................................Manual . 219

..................Fluid Selection . 218, 219..............Identification Number . 288.............Shifting the Automatic . 173

..................Shifting the Manual . 170.....................................Treadwear . 292.......................................Trip Meter . 67

....................................Turn Signals . 70

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 259Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 261....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 292

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 155.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 256

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 211

..................................Vanity Mirror . 96.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 165

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 290....Vehicle Identification Number . 288

.............................Vehicle Storage . 252.....................................Ventilation . 103

.................................................VIN . 287...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 257

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 208

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 55

..................Warranty Coverages . 303Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 216.....................................Operation . 72

.........................................Washing . 254..................Waxing and Polishing . 255

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 74............Alignment and Balance . 237

......Cleaning Aluminum Alloys . 255

Index

U

V

W

VIII

Page 319: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

..........................Compact Spare . 262......................................Wrench . 264

Windows.....................................Cleaning . 258

..................Operating the Power . 90...........................Rear, Defogger . 73

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 72...................................Defroster . 102

.......................................Washers . 72Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 229.....................................Operation . 72

....................................Worn Tires . 236.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 285

: U.S. and Canada only

Index

IX

Page 320: 2003 RSX Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BRS0303OM/... · The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer

Service Information Summary

Gasoline: Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil: Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Brake Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Manual Transmission Fluid:

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

13.2 US gal (50 )

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Front:33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )

Rear:31 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Capacity (including differential):1.6 US qt (1.5 )

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).

API Premium grade detergent oil.

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

SAE 5W-20SAE 5W-30

217

(All except Type S)

(Type S)

221

219

(All except Type-S)

(Type-S)

219

Except Type-S:Type-S: